Home

Delta VFD-E-User-Manual

1. Function Code Description Supported Devices 01 Read coil status Y M T C 02 Read input status X Y M T C 03 Read one data T C D 05 Force changing one coil status Y M T C 06 Write in one data T C D OF Force changing multiple coil status Y M T C 10 Write in multiple data T C D D 5 Commands D 5 1 Basic Commands Commands Function Operands LD Load contact A A Y M T C LDI Load contact B A Y M T C AND Series connection with A contact X Y M T C ANI Series connection with B contact X Y M T C OR Parallel connection with A contact X Y M T C ORI Parallel connection with B contact X Y M T C ANB Series connects the circuit block ORB Parallel connects the circuit block 7 MPS Save the operation result al MRD Read the operation result the pointer not moving 7 MPP Read the result INV Inverter the result Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 D 27 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 5 2 Output Commands Commands Function Operands OUT Drive coil Y M SET Action latched ON Y M RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y M T C D D 5 3 Timer and Counters Commands Function Operands TMR 16 bit timer T K or T D CNT 16 bit counter C K or C D D 5 4 Main Control Commands Commands Function O
2. STX EH 0 Address ZE 0 Function 3 Number of data 0 Count by byte 4 Content of starting 1 address 2102H T 0 T Content of address 0 2103H 0 O 7 LRC Check T CR END LF Response message Address 01H Function 03H Number of data count by byte oH Content of address 17H 2102H 70H Content of address 00H 2103H 00H CRC CHK Low FEH CRC CHK High 5CH e data to register Command message STX ei 0 Address op 0 Function 6 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Response message STX E3 0 Address E i 0 Function 6 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Command message Response message oO oO Data address 1 Data address 1 T T 7 ZE 7 7 Data content 7 Data content 7 0 T LRC Check T LRC Check a CR CR END LF END LF RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 06H Function 06H 01H 01H Data address 00H Data address 00H 17H 17H Data content 70H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH CRC CHK High 1FH 3 08H loop detection
3. XO mov Kio DO x1 MOV To D10 API Mnemonic Operands Function 15 BMOV P S D n Block Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x y m KH Knx Kny Knm T c D BMOv BMOVP 7 steps D 7 a ere es F gt e We Operands S Start of source devices D Start of destination devices n Number of data to be moved Explanations A Range of n 1 512 2 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 3 The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used Program Example 1 When X10 On the contents in registers DO D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 D23 X10 H cenov DO D20 K4 Program Example 2 Assume the bit devices KnX KnY KnM and KnS are designated for moving the number of digits of S and D has to be the same i e their n has to be the same Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 49 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M1000 Hieno Do D20 Ka m vo M1 _Y1 M2 Y2 M3 gt Y3 M4 Y4 M5 gt Y5 me M6 gt
4. Device ID olal2hfalalstletl 7 l Terminals of AC M4 mi2 mi3 m4 mis mis Drives 3IN 30UT Card emep3say gt me ms mo Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Device ID 0 1 Terminals of AC RY MO1 Drives Relay Card 2C RY2 RY3 EME DR2CA Relay Card 3A EME R3AA RY2 RY3 RY4 3IN 3OUT Card EME D33A MO2 MO3 MO4 D 2 3 WPLSoft Installation Download PLC program to AC drive Refer to D 3 to D 7 for writing program and download the editor WPLSoft V2 09 at DELTA website http www delta com tw product em plc pic_software asp N lt WPL Editor Laddor Diagram Modo a WE Eve Edt Compiler Compeents Geach Yew Communestion Qptioos Wii Help 2x se JR QAO wz00PFPRY TiM QH ARARKRH Hd aj KAJ Transfer Setup MOV Di 02 Cosamumacamon Mode Pe o PLC __ OK Eno P Propam aj gt Replace SOO Steps VED E Type D 2 4 Program Input D 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function i Ladder Diagram Mode 0 M1000 TMR Tl K10 5 Tl ITM
5. Process Data Objects 10 Kbps PDO 20 Kbps Service Data Object 50 Kbps SDO 125 Kbps Message type Synchronization Pand 250 Kbps rate p SYNC 500 Kbps Emergency EMCY 800 Kbps Network Management 1 Mbps NMT Product code Delta VFD E AC motor drive 22 Device type 402 Vendor ID 477 Environmental Specifications Noise Immunity Environment Vibration Shock Resistance Certifications ESD IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 2 8KV Air Discharge EFT IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 4 Power Line 2KV Digital I O 1KV Analog amp Communication 1 0 1KV Damped Oscillatory Wave Power Line 1KV Digital 1 0 1KV RS IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 3 26MHz 1GHz 10V m Operation 0 C 55 C Temperature 50 95 Humidity Pollution degree 2 Storage 40 C 70 C Temperature 5 95 Humidity Standard IEC1131 2 IEC 68 2 6 TEST Fe IEC1131 2 amp IEC 68 2 27 TEST Ea Standard IEC 61131 2 UL508 B 10 4 3 Components Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port To connect with CANopen use the connector enclosed with CME COP01 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring Pin Signal Content 1 CAN_GND Ground 0V V 2 CAN_L Signal 3 SHIELD Shield 12345 4 CAN_H Signal 5 Reserved Baud Rate Setting plep Rotary switch BR sets up the communication speed on 0 a CANopen network in hex Setup range 0 7 8 F are S forbidden Srna o BR Revision Oct 2009 07EE
6. Index Sub Definition Reale RIW Size Unit NOTE 3 Inhibit time o RW U16 100us n eoo 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 5 Event timer 0 RW U16 1ms 0 Number 2 RW U8 1_ 1 Mapped Object 0x60410010 RW U32 0x1A00 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60430010 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1_ 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1A01 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 Index Sub Definition eis RW Size Unit Map NOTE Abort connection ci No actioni 0x6007 0 z 2 RW S16 Yes 2 Disable Voltage option code gt 3 Quick stop 0x603F 0 Error code 0 RO U16 Yes bit 0 3 switch status bit 4 rfg enable 0x6040 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes bit 5 rfg unlock bit 6 rfg use ref bit 7 Fault reset BitO Ready to switch on Bit1 Switched on Bit2 Operation enabled Bit3 Fault Bit4 Voltage enabled Bit5 Quick stop Bit6 Switch on disabled Bit7 Warning Bit8 Bit9 Remote Bit10 Target reached Bit11 Internal limit active Bit12 13 Bit14 15 0x6041 0 Status word 0 RO U16 Yes 0x6042 0 vl target velocity 0 RW S16 rpm Yes 0x6043 vi velocity 0 RO S16 rpm Yes demand If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes junit must be 100ms and can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6050 0 vi slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes junit must be 100ms and ca
7. Operands S1 Comparison Value 1 S2 Comparison Value 2 D Comparison result Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 45 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations 1 2 3 4 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 2 4 D 46 Designate device YO and operand D automatically occupies YO Y1 and Y2 When X10 On CMP instruction will be executed and one of YO Y1 and Y2 will be On When X10 Off CMP instruction will not be executed and YO Y1 and Y2 remain their status before X10 Off If the user need to obtain a comparison result with 2 lt and make a series parallel connection between YO Y2 X10 gt Yo Ifk10 gt D10 YO On Y1 H IfK10 D10 Y1 0n Y2 IfK10 lt D10 Y2 On To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction X10 X10 ZRST MO M2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL
8. time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo x1 LD X0 Load contact A of X0 H mie r gt and x1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Yi Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDI Load B contact X0 X17 Y0 Y17 MO0 M159 TO 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v 2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 29 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo X1 ae LDI X0 Load contact B of XO AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function AND Series connection A contact X0 X17 Y0 Y17 MO0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Explanations The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts the
9. Motor can run but cannot change speed AA Check if the setting of the max frequency is too low Yes No y Check to see if frequency is out of range upper lower boundaries No Modify the setting Press UP DOWN key to see if speed has Yes any change If there is any change Yes of the signal that sets due to noise Please contact DELTA Check if the PLC z fa frequency 0 10V and program is correc f 4 20mA No Check if the wiring between No MI1 MI6 to DCM is correct o x No Check if the wiring of external terminal is corre Yes i 4 Correct Yes wiring aa Check if frequency for each step is different No Change defective potentiometer Yes y Change frequencysetting No Check if accel decel 4 time is set correctly Yes v Please set suitable accel decel time by load inertia gt Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 5 7 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration Motor stalls during Check if acceleration Yes acceleration time is too short Y Increase setting time No v Check if t
10. Display HHH 00 08 Password Input Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 2 times of wrong password aa The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr 00 09 Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 41 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters After 3 consecutive failed attempts a blinking codE will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password an Related parameter Pr 00 09 Password Set 00 08 input password Y Password Decode Flow Chart If the password is correct x Displays 0 when 3 chances to enter the correct entering correct password password into 1sttime displays 1 if Pr 00 08 password is incorrect 2nd time displays 2 if password is incorrect END 3rd time displays code blinking If the password was entered incorrectly after three tries the keypad willbe locked Turn the power OFF ON to re enter the password 00 09 Password Set Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr 00 08 1 Password has been set an To set a password to protect your parameter settings If th
11. E 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set To reduce configuration effort for simple networks CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation scheme The 11 bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows COB Identifier CAN Identifier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function Code Node Number Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index Broadcast messages NMT 0000 0 SYNC 0001 0x80 0x1005 0x1006 0x1007 TIME STAMP 0010 0x100 0x1012 0x1013 Point to point messages Emergency 0001 1 127 0x81 OxFF 0x1014 0x1015 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix E CANopen Function Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index TPDO1 0011 1 127 0x181 0x1FF 0x1800 RPDO1 0100 1 127 0x201 0x27F 0x1400 TPDO2 0101 1 127 0x281 0x2FF 0x1801 RPDO2 0110 1 127 0x301 0x37F 0x1401 TPDO3 0111 1 127 0x381 Ox3FF 0x1802 RPDO3 1000 1 127 0x401 0x47F 0x1402 TPDO4 1001 1 127 0x481 0x4FF 0x1803 RPDO4 1010 1 127 0x501 0x57F 0x1403 Default SDO tx 1011 1 127 0x581 Ox5FF 0x1200 Default SDO rx 1100 1 127 0x601 0x67F 0x1200 NMT Error 1110 1 127 0x701 0x77F 0x1016 0x1017 Control E 1 4 CANopen Communication Protocol
12. API Mnemonic Operands Function 25 DEC P D Decrement Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x y m K H Knx kny Knm T c D DEC DECP 3 steps D a Telefe Operands D Destination Explanations 1 If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will minus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions DECP In 16 bit operation 32 768 minuses 1 and obtains 32 767 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 648 minuses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 647 Program Example When X0 goes from Off to On the content in DO minuses 1 automatically XO Hiec 00 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 55 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 30 ROR P D n Rotate to the Right Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps 2 x Y M K H Knx Kny knm T c D ROR RORP 5 steps D e llelele n Operands D Device to be rotated n Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions RORP Program Example When X0 goes from Off to
13. ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2 a Min AVI4 Input Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 a Min AVI4 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 1214 Max AVI4 Input Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 a Max AVI4 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 1246 Min ACI3 Input Current Unit mA Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 1217 Min ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 1248 Max ACI3 Input Current Unit mA Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 12 19 Max ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 173 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 1220 A Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO1 1 ACO1 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO1 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA aa Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IE TB 18 16 ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2 1221 AO1 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current aa This parameter
14. eeeeeeeeeees B 4 B 1 2 Specifications for Brake Unit eeens B 7 B 1 3 Dimensions for Brake Unit ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeenneeeeee B 8 B 1 4 DIN Rail Installation 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenneeeene B 9 B 2 No fuse Circuit Breaker Chart ee eecceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeneeeesneeees B 10 B 3 Fuse Specification Chart ce ceceeeeeeceesseeeeeeneeeeessneeeeseneeeeseaees B 11 B 4 AC Ceo EE T B 12 B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value ccceeeeeeeeees B 12 B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value B 13 B4 S AppliCations ies ccge2edeectceiestoee a estan lee stateny B 14 B 5 Zero Phase Reactor RF220XO0A 2 e eececeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees B 17 B 6 Remote Controller RC 01 0 ec eccceeeseeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeeneeeees B 18 B7 PUQO nennen nenne m E E ase eiee B 19 B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD PUOQ6 ecce B 19 B 7 2 Explanation of Display Message B 19 B 7 3 Operation Flow Chart seessissesieerireerisreriresrriresrirneerresreens B 20 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com BB KP a B A E E E ia gtr haesades T Mee iehomadycenuetes B 21 B 8 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE LE02 cee B 21 B 8 2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad B 23 B 8 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Ke YP ad rec Mi cies S E E E EE E EE E B 24 B 8 4 Key
15. Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there is any abnormal vibration A or peculiar smell Visual aural inspection and smell O Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half One Daily Year Year Visual and aural inspection Tighten If there are any loose screws h y screw if necessary If the contact works correctly Visual inspection Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there are any loose screws and Tighten the screws and press the o connectors connectors firmly in place If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual inspection and smell O If there is any crack damage r P deformation or corrosion Vis al inspection o If there is any leaked liquid or Visual inspection o deformation in capacitors 6 10 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Cooling fan of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year Visual aural inspection and turn the If there is any abnormal sound or fan with hand tur
16. Mnemonic Function ORP Rising edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO LD X0 Load A contact of X0 x1 ORP X1 X1 rising edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORF Falling edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v m Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram X0 x1 M D 42 Command code Operation LD X0 Load A contact of X0 ORF X1 X1 falling edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function PLS Rising edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand en v v a Explanations When X0 OFF ON rising edge trigger PLS command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time Program Example Ladder diagram Command code
17. setting Response before adjustment x a after adjustment Time Example 2 How to suppress the oscillation of the wave with long cycle If it is oscillation when the wave cycle is longer than integral time it needs to increase Pr 10 03 setting to suppress the oscillation 4 166 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Response before adjustment after adjustment fe Time Example 3 How to suppress the oscillation of the wave with short cycle When the cycle of oscillation is short and almost equal Differential time setting it needs to shorten the differential time setting to suppress the oscillation If Differential time l 0 0 it can not suppress the oscillation Please reduce Pr 10 02 setting or increase Pr 10 06 setting Response before adjustment after adjustment I Time Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 167 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 11 Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 11 parameters See Appendix B for details Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Multi function Output Terminal MO3 RA3 Multi funct
18. 3 5 0 14 34 8 1 37 UNIT mm inch B 10 2 3 Specifications Power supply 16 30VDC 750mW Communication Modbus in ASCII format protocol 9600 7 N 2 LonTalk free topology with FTT 10A 78 Kbps LonTalk terminal 4 pin terminals wire gauge 28 12 AWG wire strip length 7 8mm RS 485 port 8 pins with RJ 45 B 30 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 4 Wiring Service LED Service Pin PowerLED SPLED sp 1 Reserved 5 SG 2 EV 6 Reserved 3 GND 7 Reserved 4 SG 8 Reserved ouu ol i 4 Ki LonTalk LonTalk ane E Terminal definition for LonTalk system Terminal Symbol Function 1 These are twisted pair cables to connect XXX to LonTalk system Terminals 1 and 2 2 should be used as one group and the TPES 4 same for terminals 3 and 4 B 10 2 5 LED Indications There are three LEDs in front panel of CME LW01 If the communication is normal power LED SP LED should be green red LED means abnormal communication and service LED should be OFF If LEDs display do not match refer to user manual for details B 10 3 Profibus Communication Module CME PD01 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 31 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 692
19. D 36 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations When the RST command is driven motion of its specific device is as follows Device Status Y M Coil and contact will be set to OFF Present values of the timer or counter T C will be set to 0 and the coil and contact will be set to OFF D The content value will be set to 0 Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X0 H LD XO Load contact A of XO RST Y5 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function TMR 16 bit timer T K TO T15 KO K32 767 Operand T D T0 T15 DO D29 Explanations When TMR command is executed the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count When the setting value of timer is attained counting value gt setting value the contact will be as following NO Normally Open contact Open collector NC Normally Closed contact Close collector Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x0 LD x0 Load contact A of X0 T5 timer H TMR T5 K1000 TMR T5K1000 Setting is K1000 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 37 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Functi
20. Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 an The Output Frequency Lower Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 08 100 aa This setting will limit the min output frequency of the AC motor drive When the frequency command of the AC motor drive or the frequency calculated by feedback control is less than this setting the output frequency of the AC motor drive will be limited by this setting aa After starting running the AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 to the setting frequency by V f curve and won t be limited by this setting aa The Upper Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage aa If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz the Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz AR If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz and the Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is set to 1 0Hz then any Command Frequency between 1 0 10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive If the command frequency is less than 1 0Hz drive will be in ready status without output aa This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit Pr 01 07 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 49 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Output frequency 01 07 Output frequency upperlimit 01 08 Output frequency
21. Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep running Q If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level Pr 07 15 the drive will act according to Pr 07 17 and display h fai C c on the keypad Q Setting Pr 07 17 to 0 When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated it will display rc E C c on the digital keypad and the motor will stop to OHz by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 setting Setting Pr 07 17 to 1 When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated it will display DLC t amp onthe digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop Setting Pr 07 17 to 2 When the motor PTC overheat protection is activated it will display Ors 1 i2 amp on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running Q If the temperature decreases below the result Pr 07 15 minus Pr 07 16 the warning display OLr oa amp amp amp will disappear ta The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals 07 13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Unit 2ms Settings 0 9999 is 0 19998ms Factory Setting 100 4 124 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters
22. 04 12 Minimum AVI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 04 13 Maximum AVI Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 0414 Maximum AVI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 0415 Minimum ACI Current Unit mA Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 Minimum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 4 86 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Maximum ACI Current Unit mA Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 04 18 Maximum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 o1 W Terminal Mode Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 ACI 1 AVI2 04 20 Minimum AVI2 Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 Minimum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 04 22 Maximum AVI2 Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Maximum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 AR Please note the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal ACI Pr 04 19 should be set to 0 and AVI f
23. Appendix B Accessories Installation All electrical equipment including AC motor drives will generate high frequency low frequency noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation By using an EMI filter with correct installation much interference can be eliminated It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and wired according to user manual EN61000 6 4 EN61800 3 1996 EN55011 1991 Class A Group 1 General precaution EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate 2 Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive Please wire as short as possible 4 Metal plate should be grounded The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the contact area should be as large as possible Choose suitable motor cable and precautions Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter Be sure to observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable Use the cable with shielding double shielding is the best 2 The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and maximum contact area 3 Remove any paint on
24. Pr 07 06 4 120 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Example when Pr 07 06 5Hz and Pr 07 07 150 the upper limit of the compensation frequency is 7 5Hz Therefore for a 50Hz motor the max output is 57 5Hz oO If the motor speed is lower than the target speed and the speed isn t changed after adjusting Pr 07 03 setting it may reach the upper limit of the compensation frequency and need to increase Pr 07 07 setting aa Related parameters Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 07 08 Torque Compensation Time Constant Unit second Settings 0 01 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 30 aa It is usually applied in those heavy load applications which the motor current is changed frequently The current is changed for the current compensation to increase the output torque Because the frequent current change will cause the machine vibration it can increase Pr 07 08 setting to solve this problem at this moment 07 09 Slip Compensation Time Constant Unit second Settings 0 05 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 20 aa It is usually applied in those heavy load applications which the motor speed is changed frequently The speed is changed for the speed compensation to reach the synchronous speed Because the frequent speed change wil
25. protect the power system OFF Factory setting NPN Mode NPN t swt PNP Please refer to Figure 7 for wiring of NPN mode and PNP mode Factory setting Factory setting ACI Mode ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 Recommended Circuit when power supply SA MC l ON FWD Stop e REV Stop e Multi step 1 e Multi step 2 4 Multi step 3 4 Multi step 4 Digital Signal Common G 5KQ Analog Signal Common Ly Main circuit power terminals Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 ZME http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring brake resistor optional _BR p DCM JES ACM 10V Power supply 10V 20mA AVI Master Frequency Oto 10V 47K amp ACI 4 20mA 0 10V ACM E Multi function contact output Refer to chapter2 4 for details Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting Drive is in operation 48V50mA Max Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function Output Terminal factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 serial interface NOT for VFD E C models Reserved EV GND SG SG Reserved Reserved Reserved For VFD E C models ONDAN Control circuit terminals please refer to fig
26. 10 Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value 11 Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall 12 Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating supervision Over Current Stall 13 of Active when the Over Current Stall function operating supervision When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn Heat Sink Overheat 14 off the drive When it is higher than 850C 1850F it will be Warning ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision Active when the PID function is operating 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV ia Zero Speed Output Active unless there is an output frequency present at Signal terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAvE ji Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt Pr 03 14 Deactivated when Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 15 after STOP command Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Multi function Input Terminal MI9 Multi function Input Terminal M110 4 169 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Aw
27. AC Drive Current x 100 with Motor Current Motor rated current in A on type shield AC Drive Current Rated current of AC drive in A see Pr 00 01 Pr 07 00 must be greater than Pr 07 01 Example Suppose that the rated current of 460V 2 0HP 1 5kW is 4 2A with the factory setting 4 2A The range that user can set is from 1 3A 4 2X30 to 5 0A 4 2X120 But when Pr 07 00 is set to less than 1 7A 4 2X40 it needs to set Pr 07 01 to be less than 30 FLA first In this way Pr 07 00 is greater than Pr 07 01 Pr 07 00 and Pr 07 01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control mode Pr 00 10 1 They also must be set if the Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Pr 06 06 or Slip Compensation Pr 07 03 and Pr 07 06 functions are selected The full load current should be less than the rated current of the AC motor drive and should be greater than 1 2 rated current of the AC motor drive Related parameters Pr 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Pr 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Pr 07 01 Motor No Load Current Motor 0 Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 07 01 Motor No load Current Motor 0 Unit A Settings 0 FLA to 99 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA aa This parameter is used to set the motor no load current The user must input motor no load current by the motor name
28. CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 3 the latching circuit of SET and RST commands The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made T ppriorityot stop up of RST and SET command SET Y1 It is top priority of stop when RST command is set X2 behind SET command When executing PLC from up eee to down The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same time therefore it calls Top priority of start priority of stop X2 RST Y1 It is top priority of start when SET command is set after x4 RST command When X1 and X2 act at the same SET yi time Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start a The common control circuit Example 4 condition control x1 X3 Ann CD v p X2 X4 Y1 Y2 4 X1 and X3 can start stop Y1 separately X2 and X4 can start stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series Therefore Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1 D 14 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Example 5 Interlock control Appendix D How to Use PLC Function xi LT E xali I x4 i Y2 i The figure above is the circuit of interlock contro
29. CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 Ground Fault Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA GFF Is output circuit cable or motor of AC motor drive gt grounded ves Remove ground fault Ground fault 5 3 Over Voltage OV Over voltage td Reduce voltage to No Is voltage within be within spec specification Yes z Yes Has over voltage occurred without bap m Maybe AC motor drive No has malfunction or v misoperation due to No When OV occurs check if the noise Please contact j4 voltage of DC BUS is greater DELTA than protection value es Yes v No Dose OV occur when Increase ee sudden acceleration deceleration stops time Yes No Increase acceleration time Yes i 7 Increase setting time No v Need to consider using Reduce moment _No Tae brake unit or of inertia lt 4 Reduce moment of load inertia DC brake ce No Use brake unit or DC brake prai ig Need to check control method Please contact DELTA 5 2 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 5 4 Low Voltage Lv Low voltage Chapter 5 Troubleshooting r8 _ Is
30. ERE ESE ME gt EE ra eE ka aa A A GO START NOTE Inthe selection mode press RHA to set the parameters U WE CE gt WE Os A ie Gi r A Success to Input data error set parameter NOTE In the parameter setting mode you can press js toreturn the selecting mode To shift data START CEAN M EPH E E Be Ge a os enren enter PLC2 mode or Ir Bi DiC i gt EM H enter PLC1 mode Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 23 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 8 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad Digit 0 1 2 wo B a O N o LED I 3 Display 4 m E Ea iz English alphabet gt o w O o 9 a m 0 LED og Display English f alphabet O Q T 3 q A LED Display English alphabet LED Display lo a English Alpnabet p Q LED o Display 7 1 a u V v Ww w X x Y LED Display os l English alphabet LED Display K Hapi lt 3 z l 1 O o I o a aD lt IN B 8 4 Keypad Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeter inch 71 9 2 83 25 9 1 02 8 6 0 34 52 4 2 06 i M3 0 5 2x T EA 3 Ky 3 QE ILOILO lt 7S 7 N t 16 3 0 64 1 5 0 06 61 0 2 40 B 24 Revision Oct 2009 O7
31. For example MI1 27 MI2 28 When MI1 and MI2 are OFF it selects motor 0 2g Motor selection bit When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF it selects motor 1 1 When MI1 is OFF and MI2 is ON it selects motor 2 When MI1 and MI2 are ON it selects motor 3 CJ Multi Step Speed 4 94 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 05 07 Frequency 1 05 06 05 08 05 05 05 09 05 04 05 10 05 03 1 ir oer 05 11 05 02 a fob f o i 05 12 JOG Freq 52y j 01 15 a i 1 05 13 05 00 i 3 te 4 Vid E s a Por 05 14 Mastey Sp ed poaa i l H 1 Run Stop L ieee 7 8 9110 11 12 13 14 15 PU external terminals Comin Caton 5 g MISE NIB or a ms T E m 2208 ieee 2 ES 3rdspeed ELS mistomie 3 OFF a a E JogFreq OFF 4 i Multi speed via External Terminals MI6 4 MI5 3 MI4 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON nd speed OFF OFF ON OFF ri speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF
32. It has services as follows NMT Network Management Object SDO Service Data Object PDO Process Data Object EMCY Emergency Object E 1 4 1 NMT Network Management Object The Network Management NMT follows a Master Slave structure for executing NMT service Only one NMT master is in a network and other nodes are regarded as slaves All CANopen nodes have a present NMT state and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes The state diagram of a node are shown as follows E 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Initializing us Reset Application 9 4 10 11 bas gt m Reset Communication gt l P 14 7 Pre Operation ABCD E OORU Stopped AB 6 8 12 Operation ABCD 1 After power is applied it is auto in initialization state A NMT 2 Enter pre operational state automatically B Node Guard 3 6 Start remote node C SDO 4 7 Enter pre operational state D Emergency 5 8 Stop remote node E PDO 9 10 11 Reset node F Boot up 12 13 14 Reset communication 15 Enter reset application state automatically 16 Enter reset communication state automatically
33. Settings 0 00 to 600 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 aa This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation distance When the multi function input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON it will start to decelerate after getting the delay time from Pr 01 20 to Pr 01 25 and get the final position jan This is simple position function NOT the precision position function Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 55 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters f t k tx 1 t2 gt MI 25 t t t 120 S nx x By gt n f x 2 p S operation distance n rotation speed revolution second n rotation speed revolution second P pole number of motor tx delay time sec f operation frequency t2 deceleration time sec Assume that the radius of the 4 pole motor is r and rotation speed is n rpm n T Example 1 Assume that motor speed is 50Hz the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec Pr 01 25 2 and the deceleration time from 50Hz to OHz is 10 seconds The rotation speed n 120 X 50 4 rpm min 25 rpm sec The revolution numbers 25 X 2 12 2 175 revolutions f Hz 50 t id 10sec 2sec MI 25 ON t Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 175 X 2r r It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles Example 2 As
34. Y6 M7 gt Y7 M8 Y10 M9 gt Y11 M10 gt Y12 M11 Y13 Program Example 3 To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause confusion please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers When S gt D the BMOV command is processed in the order as O gt X10 Bmov p20 p19 K3 P20 5 gt 219 D21 gt D20 p22 2 p21 When S lt D the BMOV command is processed in the order as gt X11 H emov p10 p11 K3 2190 5 211 D11 gt D12 D122 D13 API Mnemonic Operands Function 20 ADD P S4 S2 D Addition Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OP x Y M K H Knx KnY Knm T c p APP ADDP 7 steps S al 3 s ele les S2 aa 3 s ele le D a Wele le Operands S1 Summand S2 Addend D Sum D 50 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D 3 The highest bit is symbolic bit O and 1 which is suit
35. http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories NFB MC R L1 6 R L1 U T1 S L2 6 Oe S L2 V T2 TIL3 6 8 T L3 W T3 VFD Series Thermal Overload Relay or temperature Absorber SA Surge P N MOTOR N Brake Unit Thermal Overload Relay P B1 a QL Brake a BR Resistor i Temperature Switch Note1 When using the AC drive with DC reactor please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive user manual for the wiring of terminal P of Brake unit Note2 Do NOT wire terminal N to the neutral point of power system Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 B 3 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors Dimensions are in millimeter Order P N BRO80W200 BRO80W750 BR300W100 BR300W250 BR300W400 BR400W150 BR400W040 Model no L1 L2 H D w Max Weight g BRO80W200 140 125 20 5 3 60 160 BRO80W750 BR300W100 BR300W250 215 200 30 5 3 60 750 BR300W400 BR400W150 265 250 30 5 3 60 930 BR400w040 B 4 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR500
36. 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters a Status 2 unexpected power off such as momentary power loss DC BUS voltage Thelevel for DEB retum time Lv 30V 58V The level for soft start relay to be ON Lv 30 Lvlevel power side DEB function is activated O Output freque ncy gt DEB retum time os25 08 26 Speed Search during Start up Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable Factory Setting 0 AR This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with high inertia A motor with high inertia will take a long time to stop completely By setting this parameter the user does not need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive If a PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor then the speed search will start from the speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the setting frequency aa When using this parameter with PG feedback control this function will be enabled as Pr 13 00 and Pr 13 01 are set It has no relation with Pr 00 10 Pr 08 04 and Pr 08 06 will be disabled when using this parameter with PG feedback control AR Please make sure Pr 13 00 to Pr 13 02 are set correctly An incorrect setting may cause the motor to exceed its speed limit and permanent damage to the motor and machine can occur 08 27 X Speed Sear
37. 0x00000200 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 0x1400 00 Acyclic amp Synchronous 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RO U8 0x80000300 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 0x1401 00 Acyclic amp Synchronous 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60400010 RW U32 0x1600 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60420020 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1_ 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1601 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 5 RO U8 0x00000180 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 0x1800 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous 3 Inhibit time o RW u16 100us MeS 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 Reserved 5 Event timer 0 RW U16 1ms 0x1801 0 Number 5 RO U8 0x80000280 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix E CANopen Function
38. 1 When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large capacity power transformer 600kVA or above or when a phase lead capacitor is switched excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged To avoid this use an AC input reactor optional before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor Drive select the AC Motor Drive current gt 1 25x Sum of the motor rated currents The starting and accel decel characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive Compared to running the motor D O L Direct On Line a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected If higher starting torque is required such as for elevators mixers tooling machines etc use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive When an error occurs on the drive a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive output is turned off Then the motor will coast to stop For an emergency stop an external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor Parameter Settings Note C 4 1 The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz less for some models with the digital keypad Setting errors may creat
39. B 10 3 1 Panel Appearance 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas B 32 B 10 3 2 DIMENSIONS s nirera n e eure AE B 33 B 10 3 3 Parameters Settings in VFD E ecne B 33 B 10 3 4 Power Supply iridoider B 33 B 10 3 5 PROFIBUS Address 0 0 ceccceececeeeeeeeeeeeereeeneeeeneeeeaeeeaees B 33 B 10 4 CME COPO01 CANOpeN cceceeeceteeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeas B 34 B 10 4 1 Product Profile oo cc ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas B 34 B 104 2 Specifications sessie B 34 B 10 4 3 Components 0000 02 22 cece ceeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeenaees B 35 B 10 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting B 36 B 11 DIN Rail weenie inn nea anne eas B 38 B 11 1 MKE DRA visonerien onteien ii ii i e orains B 38 Bitd 2 MKE DRB ha r aa aa ea east EA B 39 Bitd 3 MIKE EP EETA ETET AA E B 39 B 12 EMI FET a ee te Bet a A ae kt en lS B 40 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 0 00 C 1 C 1 Capacity Formulass eisirean aiaiai C 2 C 2 General Precaution diiine aian E aaa ai Eie C 4 C 3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenneeeeneaees C 5 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function cccccccccccecceeeeeeeerererenenenenenenenene D 1 D 1 PLO OVGIView tic esoctece cece eels See dee gee te ee teenie D 1 Ded IMtrOductiOn 22 5 5 2 22s n0cei4 a aa a Aedang die sti iaa aa D 1 D 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor WPLSOft 0 ccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeecteee
40. B2 Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A Stranded VFD110E23A 43A 6 46 AWG 30kgf cm cays 2 is VFD055E23C 43C 13 31 3mm 26in Ibf Only 75 C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C Orna To connect 6 AWG 13 3 mm wires use Recognized Ring Terminals Main circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W TS B1 B2 Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C 4 14 AWG 57kgf cm Stranded 21 2 i copper VFD185E43A 43C 2 1mm 49 5in Ibf Only 75 C VFD220E43A 43C 2 4 Control Terminals Circuit diagram for digital inputs NPN current 16mA PNP Mode NPN Mode DCM 24 A as Multi Input A A i i multi input EY re oE Terminal 1 i ft terminal iT J aia E Ak 4 i i i i i p 4 ae i i deces f i sea 424 Internal Circuit Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 17 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring The position of the control terminals eee o RS 485 M1 MI2 MI3 Ml4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V Terminal symbols and functions Fac
41. Operation XO LD X0 Load A contact of X0 MO PLS MO MO rising edge output SET LD M0 Load the contact A of MO Timing Diagram SET YO YO latched ON xo 7 m MO jl a scan time l YO__ Mnemonic Function PLF Falling edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand se v v Explanations When X0 ON OFF falling edge trigger PLF command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 43 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation http Awww automatedpt com X0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 MO PLF MO MO falling edge output LD M0 Load the contact A of MO SET YO YO latched ON Timing Diagram X0 MO p a scan time m YO Mnemonic Function END Program End Operand None Explanations It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program PLC will scan from address o to END command after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again D 5 9 Description of the Application Commands Mnemonic Steps Codes P API COE Function 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit 10 CMP v Compare 7 Transmission 11 ZCP v Zone compare 9 Comparison
42. P LRC CHK Low T LRC CHK High 7 END 1 CR END 0 LF The explanation of exception codes Exception code Explanation Illegal function code 01 The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive Illegal data address 02 The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive Illegal data value 03 The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive 04 Slave device failure The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action Communication time out 10 If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 3 7 Communication program of PC The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode on a PC in C language include lt stdio h gt include lt dos h gt include lt conio h gt include lt process h gt define PORT 0x03F8 the address of COM1 the address offset value relative to COM1 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 153 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters define THR 0x0000 define RDR 0x0000 define BRDL 0x0000 define IER 0x0001 define BRDH 0x0001 define LCR 0
43. Q When Pr 02 07 is set to 0 it uses the external terminals UP DOWN key to increase decrease the frequency F as shown at the right of the following figure Its function is the same as the UP DOWN key on the digital keypad In this mode it also can use UP DOWN key on the keypad to control Frequency frequency command Time on emia DOWN 0 0 MI4 External terminal UP key ON OFF DCM aa When Pr 02 07 is set to 1 increase decrease the frequency by acceleration deceleration settings Pr 01 09 01 12 It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running 4 66 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency frequency command gt increase by accel time Time multi function input set to 10 UP command ON OFF aa When Pr 02 07 is set to 2 use multi function input terminal ON OFF to increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 Frequency frequency command increase by 0 01 10 00Hz 2ms Time multi function input ON OFF set to 10 UP command a time for ON needs gt 2ms aa When Pr 02 07 is set to 3 increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 unit pulse input Every ON after OFF is regarded as a input pulse Frequency frequency command by Pr 02 08 setting Time multi function input s
44. This command is used to detect if the communication between master device PC or PLC and AC motor drive is normal The AC motor drive will send the received message to the master device ASCII mode Command message Response message STX Ei STX te Address Address s 0 A 0 Function g Function g T oO T oO Data address Oo Data address oO T T ZE ZE 7 7 Data content 7 Data content 7 0 T LRC Check n LRC Check L CR CR END LF END LF Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 145 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 08H Function 08H 00H 00H Data address Data address 00H 00H 17H 17H Data content Data content 70H 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH CRC CHK High 1FH 4 10H write multiple registers write multiple data to registers Example Set the multi step speed Pr 05 00 50 00 1388H Pr 05 01 40 00 OFAOH AC drive address is 01H ASCII Mode Command message Response me
45. connection contact LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 39 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function LD X11 Load A contact of X11 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil MCR NO Disable NO common series connection contact Mnemonic Function LDP Rising edge detection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0O C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Explanations Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising edge into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO X1 LDP X0 Start X0 rising edge detection Hi t S AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDF Falling edge detection operation X0 X17 Y0 Y17 MO M159 T0 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v po Explanations Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling edge into the accumulative register Program Example D 40 Revisi
46. enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET Source of First disabled w02 01 esl 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 1 i Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 STOP ramp to stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 02 02 Stop Method 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop PWM Carrier 02 03 Frequency 1 to 15kHz Selections 0 Enable forward reverse operation 02 04 eee 1 Disable reverse operation 2 Disabled forward operation 0 Disable Operation status is not changed 02 05 Line Start Lockout even if operation command source Pr 02 01 1 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 7 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 0 Decelerate to 0 Hz 02 06 Loss of ACI Signal 1 Coast to stop and display AErr i 4 20mA 2 Continue operation by last frequency command 0 by UP DOWN Key 1 Based on accel decel time 02 07 Up Down Mode 2 Const
47. gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Digital Keypad Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 19 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Digital When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Keypad priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Communication Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 20 Selection Pr 02 01 setting When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Communication priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 This function has top priority to set the direction for running If Pr 02 04 0 21 Forward Reverse Used to select the first second frequency command source Refer to Pr 02 00 and 02 09 ON 2 Frequency command source Source of second 22 frequency command enabled m OFF 1 Frequency command source ON Run PLC Program OFF Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is Run Stop PLC enabled it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC Program PLC1 program When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the 2 NOT for VFD E C PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be models stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status Revisio
48. http Awww automatedpt com CANopen is a CAN based higher layer protocol and was designed for motion oriented machine control networks such as handling systems Version 4 of CANopen CiA DS301 is standardized as EN50325 4 The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile CiA DS301 as well as a framework for programmable devices CiA 302 recommendations for cables and connectors CiA 303 1 and SI units and prefix representations CiA 303 2 Device Profile CiA DSP 401 Device Profile CiA DSP 404 Device Profile CiA DSP XXX OSI Layer 7 Application OSI Layer 2 Data Link Layer OSI Layer 1 Physical Layer E 2 Communication Profile CiA DS 301 CAN Controller CAN 2 0A ISO 11898 CAN bus Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function E 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition W Lis 1 1 socket plug PIN Signal Description 1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line dominant high 2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line dominant low 3 CAN_GND Ground OV V 4 SG 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V
49. if the surrounding environment is humid you should put exsiccator in the package 6 DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature It may cause condensation and frost 7 If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months the temperature should not be higher than 30 C Storage longer than one year is not recommended it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors 8 When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places with humidity and dust it s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Receiving and Inspection This VFD E AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment After receiving the AC motor drive please check for the following a Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive the User Manual Quick Start and CD Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order 1 1 1 Nameplate Information Example for 1HP 0 75kW 3 phase 230V AC motor drive AC Drive Model gt MODEL VFD007E23A Input Spec INPUT 3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz5 1A Ou
50. increase Pr 10 04 Differential Time D 8 Refer to Pr 10 00 10 17 for PID parameters settings 10 00 PID Set Point Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys 2 AVI 0 10VDC 3 ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC og Note that the measured variable feedback controls the output frequency Hz An When Pr 10 00 2 or 3 the set point Master Frequency for PID control is obtained from the AVI or ACI AVI2 external terminal 0 to 10V or 4 20mA or from multi step speed When Pr 10 00 1 the set point is obtained from the keypad an When Pr 10 01 1 or 3 Negative feedback Error Err setpoin SP feedback FB When the feedback will be increased by the increasing output frequency please use this setting Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 159 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters jaa When Pr 10 01 to 0 or 2 Positive feedback Error Err feedback FB setpoint SP When the
51. lower limit t Frequency command REES Acceleration Time 1 Taccel 1 Unit second KRES v Deceleration Time 1 Tdecel 1 Unit second 1R EES Acceleration Time 2 Taccel 2 Unit second sire v Deceleration Time 2 Tdecel 2 Unit second Settings 0 1 to 600 0 sec 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 10 0 an Acceleration deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3 MI12 MI7 MI12 are optional to 7 set Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 7 or Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to 7 The factory settings are acceleration time 1 aa The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 down to 0 Hz gq If the setting of the acceleration deceleration time is too short it may trigger the protection Pr 06 01 Over Current Stall Prevention during Accel or Pr 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention and make the actual acceleration deceleration time be larger than this setting A If the setting of the acceleration time is too short it may cause over current during acceleration and damage the motor or trigger the protection function If the setting of the deceleration time is too short it may cause over current during deceleration or over voltage of the AC motor drive and damage the motor or trigger th
52. mm inch Frame Ww w1 H H1 D D1 D2 S1 S2 BA 100 0 89 0 174 0 162 0 152 0 50 0 4 0 5 5 5 5 3 94 3 50 6 86 6 38 5 98 1 97 0 16 0 22 0 22 Dra Frame B B1 VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C 1 14 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Frame C D D1 D2 H T of igi a ot e vid S2_ Unit mm inch Frame w wi H H1 D D1 D2 1 2 c1 130 0 116 0 260 0 246 5 169 2 78 5 8 0 6 5 5 5 5 12 4 57 10 24 9 70 6 66 3 09 0 31 0 26 0 22 gt fea Frame C C1 VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFDO75E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 15 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Frame D SE TEG UUE S1 s2_ Unit mm inch Frame WwW wi H H1 D D1 D2 S1 S2 200 0 180 0 310 0 290 0 190 0 92 0 10 0 10 0 9 0 7 87 7 09 12 20 11 42 7 48 3 62 0 39 0 39 0 35 Dra Frame D D1 VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C D 1 16 Revision Oct
53. second Settings 0 1 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 1 aa Pr 06 04 is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive a Pr 06 05 sets the time for how long over torque must be detected before OL2 is displayed og The method to detect over torque is shown as follows 1 when output current exceeds over torque detection level Pr 06 04 2 when over torque time exceeds over torque detection time Pr 06 05 If a Multi function Output Terminal is set to over torque detection Pr 03 00 03 01 04 the output is on Please refer to Pr 03 00 03 01 for details aa For general motor the output torque and output current of the AC motor drive will in proportion in V f control Thus it can use the output current of the AC motor drive to limit the output torque of motor aa Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection OL1 Factory Setting 2 Settings 0 Operate with a Standard Motor self cooled by fan 1 Operate with a Special Motor forced external cooling 2 Operation disabled aa This parameter is used to set the operation selection of the electronic thermal overload relay Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 111 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters An This function is used to protect
54. set to 0 0 the skip frequency is invalid The frequency command F can be set within the range of skip frequency At this moment the output frequency H will be less than the lower limit of skip frequency When the drive accelerates decelerates the output frequency will pass the range of skip frequency 08 09 s 08 10 frequency is decreased yA y 08 11 K Internal T vA Frequency k Command 08 13 08 14 w frequencyisincreased 0 Setting frequency command 08 15 Auto Restart After Fault Settings 0 to 10 Factory Setting 0 0 Disable 4 132 Only after an over current OC or over voltage OV fault occurs the AC motor drive can be reset restarted automatically up to 10 times Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset restart operation after any fault has occurred When enabled the AC motor drive will restart with speed search which starts at the frequency before the fault To set the waiting time before restart after a fault please set Pr 08 07 Base Block Time for Speed Search When the fault times exceeds Pr 08 15 setting the drive will refuse to restart and the user needs to press RESET for continuous operation Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters AR Related parameter Pr 08 16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault 08 16 Auto Res
55. the corresponding motor rated current of motor rated frequency in standard motor figure in Pr 06 06 X150 the AC motor drive will start to count time When accumulated time exceeds Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic setting the electronic thermal overload relay protection OL1 will be ON 2 Pr 06 06 is set to 1 Operate with a Special Motor forced external cooling when the output current is greater than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 X the corresponding motor rated current of motor rated frequency in special motor figure in Pr 06 06 X150 the AC motor drive will start to count time When accumulated time exceeds Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic setting the electronic thermal overload relay protection OL1 will be ON The actual action time of electronic thermal characteristic will be adjusted by the output current of the AC motor drive motor load rate For large current it needs short time to activate the lt electronic thermal protection function For small current it needs long time to activate the I t electronic thermal protection function as shown in the following figure Related parameters Pr 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection and Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 gt fea Please refer to Pr 06 06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection OL1 for curve figure of standard motor and special motor Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 113 CA
56. v Check wiring at R S and T terminals M Correct wiring Yes y F F F No Tighten all screws Check if the screws of terminals are tightened gt gt 9 Yes 7 Y es Please check the wiring Check if the input voltage of R S Tis unbalanced and power system for No abnormal power Vv Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 5 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting CALL NOW 800 985 6929 5 9 Motor cannot Run Motor cannot run Reset after clearing fault and then RUN Check KPE LE02 for normal display Yes Yes Check if there is any fault code displayed It can run when no faults occur l Press RUN key to check if it can run Press UP key to set frequency fYes N 0r REV command http Awww automatedpt com Check if non fuse breaker and magnetic contactor are ON No Set them to ON Yes id Check if any faults Check if input No occur such as voltage is normal Lv PHL or disconnection Yes v Input RUN command 18 Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA by keypad Check if input FWD No Y Press UP to check if motor Yes can
57. 0 and S4 0 D1027 frequency command controlled by PID 1 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 D 61 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function MO M1 M2 M1000 API Mnemonic Operands Function 142 FREQ P 1 52 53 Operation control of the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x Y M K J H Knx Kny Knm T C D FREQ FREQP 7 steps S1 S2 k s3 Operands S1 frequency command S2 acceleration time S3 deceleration time Explanation 1 This command can control frequency command acceleration time and deceleration time of the AC motor drive Please use M1025 to RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive and use M1025 to control the operation direction FWD ON REV OFF Program Example 1 M1025 RUN ON STOP Off the AC motor drive M1026 operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON M1015 frequency is reached 2 When M10 ON setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300 3 00Hz and acceleration deceleration time is 0 3 When M11 ON setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K3000 30 00HZz acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60 D 62 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com
58. 04 3 6 Exception response The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error thus the AC motor drive has no response The master device will eventually process a timeout condition The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error but cannot handle them An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message CExx will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive The xx of CExx is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below In the exception response the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1 and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned Example of an exception response of command code O6H and exception code 02H ASCII mode RTU mode STX oh Address 01H Address Low 0 Function 86H Address High 4 Exception code 02H Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Function Low 8 CRC CHK Low C3H Function High 6 CRC CHK High A1H o Exception code
59. 10 Operation Time 0 to 1439 Min 0 Min Accumulative Motor 07 11 Operation Time 0 to 65535 Day 0 Day Motor PTC 0 Disable oaz Overheat Protection 1 Enable E Input Debouncing 07 13 Time of the PTC 0 9999 2ms 100 Protection Motor PTC 07 14 Overheat Protection 0 1 10 0V 2 4 Level Motor PTC 07 15 Overheat Warning 0 1 10 0V 1 2 Level Motor PTC 07 16 Overheat Reset 0 1 5 0V 0 6 Delta Level Treatment of the 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 07 17 Motor PTC 1 Warn and COAST to stop 0 Overheat 2 Warn and keep running 07 18 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 1 Motor No Load 5 A 07 19 Current Motor 1 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 407 20 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 1 Slip Compensation 407 21 Used without PG 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Motor 1 Motor Line to line 07 22 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 1 07 23 Motor Rated Slip 0 00 to 20 00 He 3 00 Motor 1 Motor Pole Number 07 24 Motor 1 2to10 4 4 20 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Povo Customer etting 07 25 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 2 Motor No Load F 07 26 Current Motor 2 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 07 27 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Moto
60. 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 10 PID Control A Common applications for PID control 1 Flow control A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and perform accurate flow control 2 Pressure control A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and perform precise pressure control 3 Air volume control An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have excellent air volume regulation 4 Temperature control A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for comfortable temperature control 5 Speed control A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master slave operation Pr 10 00 sets the PID setpoint source target value PID control operates with the feedback signal as set by Pr 10 01 either O 10V voltage or 4 20mA current B PID control loop drive execute PID control output value Setpoint K 1 T x5 l T xS feedback signal sensor K Proportional gain P T Integral time 1 Ty Derivative control D S Operator C Concept of PID control 1 Proportional gain P the output is proportional to input With only proportional gain control there will always be a steady state error 2 Integral time the controller output
61. 15 Base Block 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software protection enabled codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure CF 1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure CF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF 1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 4 150 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 35 PG feedback signal error PGEr 36 39 Reserved 40 Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 41 dEb error 42 ACL Abnormal Communication Loop Status of AC drive 00B RUN LED is off STOP LED is on The AC motor Drive stops 01B RUN LED blinks STOP LED is on When AC motor drive decelerates to stop Bit 0 1 10B RUN LED is on STOP LED blinks When AC motor drive is stand
62. 15 speed ON ON ON ON Multi function Input Contact Selection Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 95 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter can be used to set the status of multi function terminals MI1 MI6 N O N C for standard AC motor drive gq The MI1 MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal 2 3wire Weights Bit Q The Setting method It needs to convert binary number 6 bit to decimal number for input AA For example if setting MI3 MI5 MI6 to be N C and M11 MI2 MI4 to be N O The setting value Pr 04 09 should be bit5X2 bit4X2 bit2X2 1X2 1X24 1X27 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following MI6 The setting value 5 4 2 NOTE bit5x2 bit4x2 Fbit2x2 2 16384 2 8192 2 4096 2 2048 2 1024 5 4 eee lle 2 512 2 256 2 128 2 64 2 32 Setting 04 09 2 16 2 8 2 4 2 2 2 1 BA When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 4 96 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Weig
63. 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring After removing the front cover check if the power and control terminals are clear Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring E General Wiring Information Applicable Codes All VFD E series are Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL and Canadian Underwriters Laboratories cUL listed and therefore comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code NEC and the Canadian Electrical Code CEC Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in Wiring Notes as a minimum standard Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data The Line Fuse Specification in Appendix B lists the recommended fuse part number for each VFD E Series part number These fuses or equivalent must be used on all installations where compliance with U L standards is a required am 1 Make sure that power is only applied to the R L1 S L2 T L3 terminals Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate 2 All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike o
64. 20m it is necessary to install a Beeclen akika hernertas ceed aeh Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com 2 3 Main Circuit CALL NOW 800 985 6929 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection Figure 1 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring For frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Brake Resistor Optional BRI _Brake Unit BUE No fuse breaker on we MC A R gt R L1 u T1 aa S o O S L2 V T2 M T T L3 w t3 amp O a GEG L Figure 2 For frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C For frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C For frame D VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Brake Resistor Optional Motor IM 3 Motor BR No fuse breaker CER MC B1 B2 R L1 U T1 S pees ge v T2 y re eS W T3 DOE Figure 3 For Frame A VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T
65. 27 0 m1 p t m2 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 Internal External Multi function Input Terminals Selection Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 aa This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal You can activate internal terminals by Pr 04 28 A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time og For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following Weights 9 2f 2 9 91 9 O external terminal Bit s 4 3 2 7 9 aie terminal a The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input AR For example if setting MI3 MI5 MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1 MI2 M14 to be external terminals The setting value should be bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X27 1X2 1X24 1X27 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 101 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 6 4 3 2 1 0 O mi Weight oo 2 2 0 external terminal Bit Ool o o 12internal terminal MIS MI6 a When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows s 11 10 n3 8 7 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 O e
66. 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC re aem pene fo e 00 410 03 Integral Time I 0 00 to 100 0 sec 0 00 disable 1 10 06 Primary Delay Filter 0 0 to 2 5 sec Time PID Output Freq 10 07 Limit 0 to 110 1 PID Feedback 10 08 Signal Detection 0 0 to 3600 sec 0 0 disable Time 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the 10 09 Erroneous PID 1 Warn and COAST to stop Feedback Signals 2 Warn and keep operation Gain Over the PID 1019 Detection Value 0 0 t0 110 0 o w 10 11 Source of PID Set 0 00 to 600 0Hz 000 point 1 0 10 12 PID Offset Level 1 0 to 50 0 10 0 J 5 0 Detection Time of 10 13 PID Offset 0 1 to 300 0 sec 10 14 Sleep Wake Up 0 0 to 6550 sec Detection Time 4 26 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 10 15 Sleep Frequency 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 10 16 Wakeup Frequency 0 00 to 600 0 Hz e Minimum PID 0 By PID control 10 17 Output Frequency Selection 1 By minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card No function Multi function AC drive operational 11 00 Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Master frequency attained Zero speed Over torque detection Multi function Base Block B B indication 11 01 Output Terminal MO3 RA3 Low voltage indication Operation mode i
67. 5 0 8 1 2 18 5 25 45 67 5 0 7 1 2 22 30 45 67 5 0 7 1 2 B 4 3 Applications Connected in input circuit Application 1 Question When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power and one of them is ON during operation When applying power to one of the AC motor drive the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs during operation CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com Correct wiring CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories M1 reactor ye YY AC motor drive motor Ne M2 a 0 YY AC motor drive motor J E Mn VY a Bs AC motor drive motor Application 2 Question Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches on off These spikes may damage the mains circuit Correct wiring Silicon Controlled Rectifier z an eo reactor YY AC motor drive reactor a YY A s A k Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 B 15 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Application 3 Question Used to improve
68. 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer E 04 05 Multi function Input 0 No function Terminal MI3 Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 04 06 Multi function Input Multi Step speed command 3 Terminal MI4 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset 04 07 Multi function Input Accel Decel inhibit 3 Terminal MI5 Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation oO ON Do F WO DN 04 08 Multi function Input External base block 23 Terminal MIS Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Counter reset E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 185 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com oe 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Custome
69. 9 15 steps Jog up down Set by RUN and STOP 2 wires 3 wires MI1 MI2 MI3 JOG operation RS 485 serial interface MODBUS programmable logic controller Multi step selection 0 to 15 Jog accel decel inhibit 2 accel decel switches counter external Base Block ACI AVI selections driver reset UP DOWN key settings NPN PNP input selection Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix A Specifications General Specifications AC drive operating frequency attained zero speed Base Block fault Multi function Output Indication indication overheat alarm emergency stop and status selections of input terminals Analog Output Signal Output frequency current Contact will be On when drive malfunctions 1 Form C change over contact and 1 open collector output for standard type Built in PLC NOT for CANopen models AVR accel decel S Curve over voltage over current stall prevention 5 fault records reverse inhibition momentary power loss restart DC brake auto torque slip compensation auto tuning adjustable carrier frequency output frequency limits parameter Operation Functions lock reset vector control PID control external counter MODBUS communication abnormal reset abnormal re start power saving fan control sleep wake frequency 1st 2nd frequency source selections 1st 2nd frequency source combinat
70. 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Name Overheating Heat sink temperature too high Low voltage The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value Overload The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current NOTE The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150 of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip Overload 2 Motor overload CC current clamp OV hardware error GFF hardware error 1 External Base Block Refer to Pr 08 07 6 2 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 FONS http www automatedpt com Corrective Actions Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins Check the fan and clean it Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation See chapter 1 Check whether the input voltage falls within the AC motor drive rated input voltage range Check for abnormal load in motor Check for correct wiring of input power to R S T for 3 phase models without phase loss Check whether the motor is overloaded Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 Use the next higher power AC motor drive model Check for possible mo
71. 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters an This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command source is changed Operation status when operation Pr 02 05 Start lockout Run when power is ON command source is changed 0 Disable AC motor drive will run Keep previous status 1 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run Keep previous status 2 Disable AC motor drive will run Change according amie nev operation command source 3 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run peel pene Een gq When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON NPN mode MI1 MI2 DCM closed PNP mode MI1 MI2 24V closed please refer to chapter 2 wiring for details the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 after power is applied lt For terminals MI1 and MI2 only gt 1 When Pr 02 05 is set to 0 or 2 AC motor drive will run immediately 2 When Pr 02 05 is set to 1 or 3 AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operation command is cancelled MI1 DCM close ON OFF ON power is applied OFF ON output frequency i f Pr 02 05 0 0r 2 it will run i output frequency Pr 02 05 1 or 3 e it won trun when power is applied It needs t received a run command after previous command is cancelled 4 64 Revision
72. Amps Amps 3 5 impedance impedance 2 2 3 12 18 1 25 2 5 3 7 5 18 27 0 8 1 5 5 5 7 5 25 37 5 0 5 1 2 7 5 10 35 52 5 0 4 0 8 11 15 45 67 5 0 3 0 5 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP aa eae Mi pees ps Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 8 12 3 5 5 5 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 15 20 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 18 5 25 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 22 30 45 67 5 0 7 1 2 B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 115V 230V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kw HP ee Senate ee lee Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 4 9 12 0 4 1 2 6 6 6 5 9 0 75 1 8 12 3 5 1 5 2 8 12 1 5 3 2 2 3 12 18 1 25 2 5 3 7 5 18 27 0 8 1 5 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 13 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com kw HP ia eine se Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 5 5 75 25 37 5 0 5 1 2 75 10 35 52 5 0 4 0 8 11 15 55 82 5 0 25 0 5 15 20 80 120 0 2 0 4 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP pail ae Messala Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 5 5 7 5 18 27 1 5 2 5 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 15 20 35 52
73. B to run by close loop method In this control it gets the change of the electromagnetic torque of rotor and the load torque from the change of slip ratio 2 The V f control is the constant value control mode Although it prevents the main questions of the decreasing frequency and increasing magnetic field the magnetic field is decreasing with frequency In such circumstance insufficient motor torque will occur when the magnetic field weakens in the low frequency At this moment it can get the best operation with Pr 07 02 setting Torque Compensation to get the torque compensation common applications pump conveyor belt compressor and treadmill Vector control 1 To operate by the change of frequency and voltage without changing the mechanical characteristic of motor it can run by open loop method and also can use with PG card refer to Appendix B to run by close loop method In this mode it is coordinate change The physical essence is the relativity of motion That means the change of rotor current only has relation with electromagnetic torque and the change of stator current only has relation with electromagnetic torque This is the characteristic of vector control 2 The vector control can eliminate the relation between electromagnetic current vector and armature flux Thus it can control the current vector and armature flux independently to raise Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 43 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww a
74. Bit1 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 Ml4 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Display the Status of Multi function Bit5 MI6 Status Input Terminal Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status Internal External 0 4095 04 27 Multi function Input Terminals Selection Internal Terminal 0 4095 Group 5 Multi Step Speeds Parameters Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 15 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters s i Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer 405 00 1st Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 01 2nd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 02 3rd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 03 4th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 04 5th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 05 6th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 06 7th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 07 8th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 08 9th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 09 10th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 10 11th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 405 11 12th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 12 13th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 13 14th Step Sp
75. CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M10 M11 M11 M10 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 63 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 6 Error Code D 64 http Awww automatedpt com Code ID Description Corrective Actions Check if the program is error and PLod 20 Data write error download the program again Power on again and download the PLSv 21 Data write error when executing program again 4 Please upload again PLdA 22 Program upload error 2 Return to the factory if it occurs continuously Check if the program is error and PLEn 23 Command error when download download program again program x Power on again and download program PLor 30 Program capacity exceeds again memory capacity PLFF 31 Command error when executing PLSn 32 Check sum error PLEd 33 There is no END command in the program PLcr 34 The command MC is continuous used more than nine times CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix E CANopen Function The built in CANopen function is a kind of remote control Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol CANopen is a CAN based higher layer protocol It provides standardi
76. CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF 4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 115 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 39 40 41 42 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 Contrsol Board CPU READ failure cF2 1 ACI signal error AErr Reserved Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 PG feedback signal error PGEr Reserved Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 dEb error ACL Abnormal Communication Loop BA In Pr 06 08 to Pr 06 12 the five most recent faults that occurred are stored After removing the cause of the fault use the reset command to reset the drive 4 116 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 7 Motor Parameters Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Unit A Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA An Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter Motor Current
77. D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit instruction Quotient Remainder 1 _ _ r _ ap a SS SN DIS orison bOO b15 ee b00 b15 b00 b15 b00 Program Example When X0 On DO will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in D21 On Off of the highest bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value xo DIV DO D10 D20 DIV DO D10 K4Y0 API Mnemonic Operands Function 24 INC P D Increment Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps op x y m k H Knx kny knm T c D INC INCP 3 steps D A alale D 54 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Operands D Destination device Explanations 1 If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will plus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions INCP In 16 bit operation 32 767 pluses 1 and obtains 32 768 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 647 pluses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 648 Program Example When X0 goes from Off to On the content in DO pluses 1 automatically Ht ner oo
78. Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 OxF3 0x00 b ndex Sub Definition Value R W Size 0x60410010 PDO1 Map 0x6041 O Status Word lines OXES RIW ye E 8 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function E 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency Object Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt The data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Content Emergency Error Error register i Code i Manufacturer specific Error Field Object 1001H Definition of Emergency Object Controller ae CANopen eee Display Error Description Error Register Code Code bit 0 7 ac 0001H Over current 7400H 1 ow 0002H Over voltage 7400H 2 oH i 0003H Overheating 4310H 3 oL 0005H Overload 2310H 1 of i 0006H Overload 1 7120H 1 ol g 0007H Overload 2 2310H 1 EF 0008H External Fault 9000H 7 oc 0009H Over current during acceleration 2310H 1 ocd OO0AH Over current during deceleration 2310H 1 oca OO0BH Over current during constant speed 2310H 1 operation GEE OOOCH Ground fault 2240H 1 u 000DH Lower than standard voltage 3220h 2 PHL 000EH Ph
79. Error register 0 RO U8 COB ID SYNC 0x1005 0 message 0x80 RW U32 ox1006 0 Communication cycle Rw u32 us 500us 15000us period 0 Manufacturer device 0x1008 0 name 0 RO U32 Manufacturer 0x109 ve hardware version 0 ac Manufacturer software 0x100A 0 version 0 RO U32 0x100C O Guarding time 0 RW U16 ms 0x80 node 1 0x100D O Guarding factor 0 RW U8 0x0000080 0x1014 0 COB ID emergency Node ID RO U32 eal It is set to be 0x1015 O Inhibit time EMCY 0 RW U16 100us multiple of 10 0 Number 0x1 RO U8 Heartbeat time can 0x1016 1 Consumer heartbeat oxo RW U32 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid Heartbeat time can 0x1017 0 Producer heartbeat oxo RW U16 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid 0 Number 0x3 RO U8 1 Vender ID 0x000001DD RO U32 0x1018 0x00002600 2 Product code model RO U32 3 Revision 0x00010000 RO U32 Server SDO 0x1200 0 Parameter 2 RO U8 COB ID Client gt 0x0000600 1 Server Node ID RO U2 E 10 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Index Sub Definition eae RIW Size Unit NOTE COB ID Client lt 0x0000580 2 Server Node ID ROUS Number 2 RO U8
80. FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 125 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Motor No load Current Motor 3 Unit A Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA 07 34 X Torque Compensation Motor 3 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 07 35 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 Unit mQ Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 07 38 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 AA The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 4 126 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 8 Special Parameters 08 00 DC Brake Current Level Unit Settings 0 to 100 Factory Setting 0 AR This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start up and stopping When setting DC Brake Current the Rated Current Pr 00 01 is regarded as 100 It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Curr
81. Installation Site Altitude Vibration Temperature Relative Humidity Atmosphere pressure Vibration 10 50 C 14 122 F for UL amp cUL 10 40 C 14 104 F for side by side mounting lt 90 no condensation allowed 86 106 kPa lt 1000m lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max 20 C 60 C 4 F 140 F lt 90 no condensation allowed 86 106 kPa lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max 2 good for a factory type environment Minimum Mounting Clearances Frame A Mounting Clearances Single drive 20mm son 120mm 50mm Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Side by side installation Air flow Air row 1 9 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B C and D Mounting Clearances Single drive Side by side installation Air flow Sal Air Flow T For VFD E P series heat sink system example 4 CS ta St a a lt lt lt Air extracting apparatus Control panel User s heat sink should comply Duct temperature 40C with following conditions Air flow speed 2 2m sec 1 Flatness lt 0 1mm 2 Roughness lt 6um 3 Grease 10um 12um 4 Screw torque 16Kgf cm 5 Recommended t
82. LOSE RUN P orward an s5o MI2 OPEN FWD General application reverse by external FARREN CLOSET REV terminals DEM 3 wire OF es MI1 CLOSE RUN on maam MI3 OPEN STOP 55 Ml2 OPEN FWD REV FWD CLOSE REV DCM Operation Command Applications Purpose Functions paad Selecting the Selection of AC motor drive control by 02 01 General application source of control external terminals digital keypad or 04 05 04 08 signal RS485 Frequency Hold Applications Purpose Functions so General application Acceleration Hold output frequency during 04 05 04 08 4 34 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Auto Restart after Fault http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters For continuous and 08 15 08 16 Air conditioners reliable operation one sahs drive san gt e 10 remote pumps without operator rESIGNIS reset automatically up to intervention times after a fault occurs Emergency Stop by DC Brake rsa z Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters AC motor drive can use DC brake for 08 00 Emergency stop emergency stop when quick stop is 08 02 High speed rotors without brake needed without brake resistor When 08 03 resistor used often take motor cooling into consideration Over torque Setting
83. MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3 wire control 04 09 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 13 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Input Debouncing 1 to 20 2ms 1 Time oat Mnanvotsoo ooo fej oar MnavFrequney 0010100 oo os waxavivotage loom fof owe MaxaviFreweney oowscoo sooo Min ACI Frequency 0 0 to 100 0 oo 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection 04 20 Min AVI2 Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V 04 21 Min AVI2 Frequency 9 0 to 100 0 04 22 Max AVI2 Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V Max AVI2 o 04 24 The Digital Input Read only Used by PLC NOT for vFD e c Bit 1 MI1 used by PLC models Bit1 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC Bit4 1 MI5 used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC 4 14 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Parameter Explanation Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used by PLC Read only The Analog Input BitO 1 AVI used by PLC 04 25 usad by PLS Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC i NOT for VED E C aie models Bit2 1 Al1 used by PLC Bit3 1 Al2 used by PLC Read only Chapter 4 Parameters BitO MI1 Status
84. MI3 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 135 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 08 24 DEB Function Settings 0 Disable Factory Setting 0 1 Enable 08 25 DEB Return Time Unit second Settings 0 250 sec Factory Setting 0 AA The DEB Deceleration Energy Backup function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss When the momentary power loss occurs this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method When the power is on again motor will run again after DEB return time for high speed axis application p Related parameter Pr 08 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection p Status 1 Insufficient power supply due to momentary power loss unstable power due to low voltage sudden heavy load DC BUS voltage Thelevel for DEB retum time it doesn tneed Lv 30V 58V multi function terminals Thelevel for soft startrelay tobe ON Lv 30 Lvlevel power side DEB function is activated l Output frequen cy lt gt N DEB rctum ime __ M S OEE When Pr 08 24is set to 0 the AC motor drive will be stopped and won t re start at the power on again 4 136 Revision Oct 2009
85. Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters When the operation command source isn t from the external terminals independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 if the two conditions below are both met 1 When operation command source is changed to external terminal Pr 02 01 1 or 2 2 The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different And the operation of the AC motor drive will be 1 When setting 0 or 1 the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status 2 When setting 2 or 3 the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status MI1 DCM close ON a OFF Pr 02 01 0 RUN Toe RUN erie output frequency Pr 02 05 2 or 3 tS This action will follow MIl1 DCM Change operation or MI2 DCM status coc eis Pr 02 01 1 or 2 ON is close OFF is open output frequency Pr 02 05 0 or 1 AR When Pr 02 05 is set to 1 or 3 it does not guarantee that the motor will never run under this condition It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch an Related parameters Pr 02 01 Source of First Operation Command Loss of ACI Signal 4 20mA Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Decelerate to OHz 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 2 Continue operation by the last frequency command
86. Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals A Time out Detection Unit second Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable An If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 09 04 A Communication Protocol Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt 2 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt 3 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt 4 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt 5 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 139 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt 2 O ON DD co jaa 4 140 1 Control by PC or PLC A VFD E can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following modes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Intercha
87. Setting Multi function 03 00 Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 0 Save Keypad amp Communication Frequency 1 Save Keypad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only 0 by Current Freq Command 1 by Zero Freq Command 2 by Frequency Display at Stop 0 00 600 0Hz 60 00 a Read Only BitO 1 by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command NOT for VFD E C models Read Only BitO 1 by Digital Keypad Bit1 1 by RS485 communication Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Bit3 1 by Multi input function Bit4 1 by PLC Operation Command NOT for VFD E C models Bit5 1 by CANopen communication 0 by carrier modulation of load current and temperature 1 by carrier modulation of load current 0 No function 1 AC drive operational 2 Master frequency attained 3 Zero speed 4 Over torque detection 4 9 4 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting adie anction 5 Base Block B B indication Output Terminal 6 Low voltage indication MO1 7 Operation mode indication 8 Fault indication 9 Desired frequency 1 attained 10 Terminal count value attained 11 Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current
88. Stall supervision Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Forward command Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Brake control Desired frequency attained Drive ready 3 Desired frequency 2 attained Desired Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz 1 Attained Analog Output 0 Analog frequency meter Signal Selection AFM 1 Analog current meter 403 04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 1t020 03 05 Terminal Count e o to 9999 Value Preliminary Count 0 to 9999 Value 0 Terminal count value attained no EF EF Active When display Terminal Count Value Attained 1 Terminal count value attained EF active 4 10 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer a 7 0 Fan O FanawaysON S ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF Farn Gontro 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained Read only Bit0 1 RLY used by PLC Bit1 1 MO1 used by PLC The Digital Output Bit2 1 MO2 RA2 used by PLC used oy FLS Bit3 1 MO3 RA3 used by PLC NOT for VFD E C eer ee models Bit4 1 MO4 RA4 used by PLC Bit5 1 MO5 RAS used by PLC Bit6 1 MO6 RAG used by PLC Bit7 1 MO7 RA7 used by PLC Read only The Ana
89. Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 129 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters k Output frequency v Input B B signal H E E Stop output voltage Output voltage V Q Disable B B signal waiting time 08 07 08 08 Current Limit A speed Search for Speed SearchSpeed Ree Renee AG Synchronization speed detection Output current A Time FWD Run POAR o BB Fig 1 B B Speed Search with Last Frequency Downward Timing Chart Oitputfregiency l a input BBsional D B La Sa Stop output voltage o 4 4 DisableB B signal Waiting time 08 07 08 08 Current Limit A Speed Search for Speed SearchSpeed ra Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run gt Ou O gt B B Fig 2 B B Speed Search with Min Output Frequency Upward Timing C hart AITE Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB Unit second Settings 0 1 to 5 0 sec Factory Setting 0 5 When momentary power loss is detected the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait B for a specified period of time determined by Pr 08 07 called Base Block Time before resuming operation This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from t
90. Terminals and wiring of main circuit Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance http www automatedpt com Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due Visual inspection O to overheat If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has Visual inspection O changed If there is any damage Visual inspection O DC capacity of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there is any leakage of liquid change of color cracks or Visual inspection O deformation Measure static capacity when Static capacity gt initial value X 0 85 o required Resi stor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to Visual inspection smell O overheating Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring If there is any disconnection between B1 O Resistor value should be within 10 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 6 9 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Transformer and reactor of main circuit Maintenance
91. VFD055E23A 23C 26 25 50 JJN 50 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com I A I A Line Fuse Model Input Output I A Bussmann P N VFD055E43A 43C 14 13 30 JJS 30 VFD075E23A 23C 34 33 60 JJN 60 VFD075E43A 43C 19 18 40 JJS 40 VFD110E23A 23C 48 45 100 JJN 100 VFD110E43A 43C 26 24 50 JJS 50 VFD150E23A 23C 70 65 150 JJN 150 VFD150E43A 43C 35 32 70 JJN 70 VFD185E43A 43C 41 38 80 JJN 80 VFD220E43A 43C 49 45 100 JJN 100 B 4 AC Reactor B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 230V 50 60Hz 1 Phase kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Induceance mP Amps Amps 3 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 6 6 5 0 4 1 2 5 7 5 3 0 75 1 8 12 1 5 1 5 2 12 18 1 25 2 2 3 18 27 0 8 230V 50 60Hz 3 Phase Inductance mH kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Amps Amps 3 5 impedance impedance 0 2 1 4 2 3 9 20 0 4 1 2 2 3 6 5 12 0 75 1 4 6 3 6 5 1 5 2 8 12 1 5 3 B 12 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Inductance mH kW HP Fundamental Max continuous
92. _ Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The over torque detection level can be 06 00 06 05 To protect set Once OC stall OV stall and over Pumps fans and hae and to torque occurs the output frequency NA te have continuous Will be adjusted automatically It is reliable operation suitable for machines like fans and P pumps that require continuous operation Upper Lower Limit Frequency n aa x Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Control the motor When user cannot provide 01 07 Pump and fan speed within upper lower limit gain or bias from 01 08 upperflower limit external signal it can be set PP individually in AC motor drive Skip Frequency Setting Soe 7 Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The AC motor drive cannot run at 08 09 08 14 Pumps and fans To prevent constant speed in the skip frequency P machine vibrations range Three skip frequency ranges can be set Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 35 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Carrier Frequency Setting http Awww automatedpt com Baer Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The carrier frequency can be 02 03 General application Low noise increased when required to reduce motor noise Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost eer Related Applications Purpose Functions P
93. aa This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost m Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 When setting to 1 it will display warning message AErr on the keypad optional in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting The AC motor drive will stop outputting immediately the motor will free run to stop Please press RESET key to clear it 4 65 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters When setting 0 or 2 it will display warning message AErr on the keypad optional in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting If it is set to 0 the motor will decelerate to OHz by the setting of deceleration time Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 If it is set to 2 the motor will continue to run For these two settings the warning message will stop blinking when ACI signal is recovered Please press RESET key to clear it gq Related parameters Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 and Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 02 07 Up Down Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By digital keypad up down keys mode 1 Based on Accel Decel Time acc to Pr 01 09 to 01 12 2 Constant speed acc to Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit acc to Pr 02 08 This parameter determines the increase decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi function Inputs when Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 are set to 10 Up command or 11 Down command
94. can be used by connecting terminals B1 and B2 directly But it can t connect DC BUS in parallel 2 8 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 7 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode A NPN mode without external power setting a Multi step 2 4 Multi step 3 os NPN sw PNP FWD STOP os REV STOP 7 Multi step 1 ___ Factory hi o L Multi step 4 O O Digital Signal Common B NPN mode with external power NPN 24 sw Was PNP FWD STOP REV STOP x Oo OO Multi step 1 Factory hi ome setting Multi step 2 Multi step 3 OO Multi step 4 0 Oo C PNP mode without external power NPN i Hsn PNP FWD STOP O REV STOP ___ Multi step 1 ___ Factory iu F a setting ulti step 2 _ Multi step 3 ___ O O Multi step 4 5 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 9 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring D PNP mode with external power NPN isu PNP FWD STOP REV STOP O oO Multi step 1 Factory ome setting Multi step 2 o Multi step 3 as Multi step 4 oO D Figure
95. clear the warning message Related parameter Pr 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic x S xz 2100 S 100 re 80 F 80 5 60 60 z 5 g 40 E 40 z 8 8 20 5 20 7 3 2 5 z 25 50 75 100 125 150 2 25 50 75 100 125 150 rated frequency of the motor S rated frequency of the motor Standard motor Special Motor self cooled by fan forced external cooling Dra When the standard motor operates in low speed with rated current the motor overload protection will occur easily Thus please use the special motor when operates in low speed with rated current Refer to Appendix C 3 How to choose a suitable motor for motor selection 4 112 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Electronic Thermal Characteristic Unit second Settings 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting 60 The parameter determines the time required for activating the l t electronic thermal protection function by the output frequency current of the AC motor drive and operation time to prevent motor from overheating The electronic thermal overload relay acts by Pr 06 06 setting 1 Pr 06 06 is set to O Operate with a Standard Motor self cooled by fan when the output current is greater than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 X
96. communication wiring is correct Return to the factory 6 5 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 2 Reset There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault A Press key on keypad 2 Set external terminal to RESET set one of Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 05 and then set to be ON 3 Send RESET command by communication gt ee Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition and to ensure a long life It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check up of the AC motor drive regularly Daily Inspection Basic check up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are Whether the motors are operating as expected Whether the installation environment is abnormal Whether the cooling system is operating as expected Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation Whether the motors are overheating during operation OP i ON Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter Periodic Inspection Before the check up always turn off the AC input po
97. detection range for the output frequency reaches the desired frequency is 2Hz X Analog Output Signal AFM Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency Meter 0 to Maximum Output Frequency 1 Analog Current Meter 0 to 250 of rated AC motor drive current aa This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0 10VDC ACM is common Refer to Pr 03 04 for applications An Related parameters Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax and Pr 03 04 Analog Output Gain 03 04 X Analog Output Gain Unit Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 aa This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 75 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters gq When Pr 03 03 is set to 0 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 of the AC motor drive corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output gq Similarly if Pr 03 03 is set to 1 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output current of the AC drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 then 2 5 times the rated current corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output fea Any type of voltmeter can be used If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V Pr 03 04 should be set using the
98. food processing machinery washing equipment to control the operation procedure It can be used instead of traditional circuit such as relay switch or counter qg Explanation for the timing diagram for multi step speeds and external terminals The Related parameter settings are 1 Pr 05 00 05 14 setting multi step speeds to set the frequency of each step speed 2 Pr 04 05 04 08 setting multi function input terminals multi step speed 1 4 3 The repeat operation setting of 1st 15th step speed frequency can use PLC program to control Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details 4 104 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 The operation direction setting of 1st 15th step speed frequency can use PLC program to control Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details 5 The operation time setting of 1st 15th step speed frequency can use PLC program to control Please refer to Appendix D How to use PLC function for details Operations Once the AC motor drive receives RUN command it will operate by parameters settings and PLC program till the 15th step speed frequency is completed aa If it is repeat operation by PLC program the AC motor drive will operate by the settings from Pr 05 00Pr 05 01 gt Pr 05 14 Pr 05 00Pr 05 01 till t
99. function Display Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E 4 182 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Setting Parameter Explanation Settings Customer 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 6 Output power factor angle n 7 Display output power P 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI I V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level I 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M Group 1 Basic Parameters Factory 401 11 Accel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 401 12 Decel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto Y Customer Setting 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of First 1 0 to 10V from AVI Master Frequency 9 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from a command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V
100. in Appendix A There may be an inrush current during power up Please check the Fuse NFB chart of pean B and select the Optional _ correct fuse with rated current Use of an NFB is optional Magnetic Please do not use a Magnetic contactor contactor as the vO switch of the AC Optional motor drive as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the AC drive Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances surges switching Input AC spikes short interruptions etc AC Line Reactor line reactor should be installed when Optional the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more or advanced capacity is activated The wiring distance should be lt 10m Refer to appendix B for details Zero phase reactors are used to Zero phase reduce radio noise especially when Reactor audio equipment is installed near the Ferrite Core inverter Effective for noise reduction Common on both the input and output sides Choke Attenuation quality is good for a wide Optional range from AM band to 10MHz Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor RF220X00A EMI filter To reduce electromagnetic interference Brake Used to reduce the deceleration time resistor and of the motor Please refer to the chart Brake unit in Appendix B for specific Brake Optional resistors Motor surge voltage amplitude EEE depends on motor cable length For Optional applications with long motor cable gt
101. is set to 14 its display will be updated regularly This update time is set by Pr 13 06 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 179 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters With the large setting in Pr 13 06 it can slow the response speed to prevent the blinking of digital number on the digital keypad Too large setting may cause the delay of RPM value via PG card qg Related parameter Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display 13 09 X Speed Feedback Filter Unit 2ms Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 16 gq This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card Too large setting may cause slow feedback response output frequency ee 7 Speed control Output H gt gt l P n frequency frequency Motor Speed upper limit d taction 13 03 13 05 01 07 Speed feedback PGtype pulse range 4 filter and motor pole number PG 13 09 13 00 13 01 13 02 PG feedback speed control 13 07 A Time for Feedback Signal Fault Unit second 0 1 to 10 0 sec 0 0 Disabled Settings Factory Setting 1 0 aa This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning see Pr 13 08 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time B D If this parameter is set to 0 0 the sys
102. is used to choose analog frequency 0 10Vdc or analog current 4 20mA to correspond to the AC motor drive s output frequency or current a AO1 Analog Output Gain Unit Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 Ba This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage range When Pr 12 21 is set to 0 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output frequency When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the max output frequency Pr 01 00 setting corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA gq When Pr 12 21 is set to 1 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output current When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the 2 5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA 4 174 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Tey NOTE If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V refer to following formula to set Pr 12 22 Pr 12 22 full scale voltage 10 100 Example When using voltmeter with full scale 5V Pr 12 22 should be set to 5 10 100 50 If Pr 12 21 is set to 0 the output voltage will correspond to the max output frequency 1223 AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO2 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA aa Besides parameter setting the vol
103. lower than Pr 06 02 setting rated current X 5 the drive will accelerate again by Pr 01 09 Pr 01 11 to catch up with the set frequency command value Related parameter Pr 06 03 Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 109 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 6 02 Over Current Detection Level current 06 02 Over Current Stall 06 02 rated current X 5 Prevention during Operation output frequency decrease Output decrease by decel time Frequency Time over current stall prevention during operation Dra Please do not set the over current stall prevention to a small value to prevent over low torque 06 03 Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Over Torque detection disabled 1 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected stop running 3 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected stop running gq This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over torque OL2 an This para
104. motor The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor Please check before operation and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully When changing the pole number the motor needs to be stopped first If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too high please let the motor free run to stop coast Submersible motor The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully With long motor cable between AC motor drive and motor available motor torque is reduced Explosion proof Ex motor Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the Ex requirements Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for Ex areas with special precautions Gear reduction motor The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed and for high speed operation needs to be considered carefully Synchronous motor The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully When the AC Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC M
105. needs to calculate the output by using proportional gain P integral time l and differential time D to control the pump It controls the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4 20mA signal corresponding to 0 10 bar as feedback to the drive VED E water pump no fuse breaker ps a ge RN eed H NFB i vat R a R1 U T1 i A oi s S L2 V T2 IM a T 5 S O T L3 W T3 ier z i E SEQ TTT m OR N throttle feedback 4 20mA corresponds to pressure 0 10 bar lt gt sensor ACI AVI X 4 20mA 0 10V DC ACM y analog signal common AVI switch ACI 1 Pr 00 04 is set to 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 2 Pr 01 09 Acceleration Time will be set as required 4 158 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 3 Pr 01 10 Deceleration Time will be set as required 4 Pr 02 01 1 to operate from the digital keypad 5 Pr 10 00 1 the setpoint is controlled by the digital keypad 6 Pr 10 01 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 7 Pr 10 01 10 17 will be set as required 7 1 When there is no vibration in the system increase Pr 10 02 Proportional Gain P 7 2 When there is no vibration in the system reduce Pr 10 03 Integral Time I 7 3 When there is no vibration in the system
106. ov IGBT Overheat 0H1 Power Board Overheat oH2 Overload oL Overload oL1 Motor over load oL2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 17 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 06 09 Second Most 8 External fault EF Recent Fault Record 9 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground fault GFF 13 Reserved 14 Phase Loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto Acel Decel failure CFA 06 10 Third Most Recent 17 SW Password protection codE Fault Record 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 06 11 Fourth Most Recent 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 Fault Record 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 ar Fifth Most Recent 25 V phase error cF3 1 Fault Record 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 4 18 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww autom
107. r BR Brake Resistor No fuse breaker ula pig MC B1 B2 i R L1 U T1 S sd S L2 vit2 amp fs T T L3 wits amp Lore QE Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 2 13 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 AC line input terminals 1 phase 3 phase U T1 V T2 W T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3 phase induction motor B1 B2 Connections for Brake resistor optional B1 Connections for External Brake unit BUE series Earth connection please comply with local regulations SEE Mains power terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Connect these terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 via a no fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3 phase AC power some models to 1 phase AC power for circuit protection It is unnecessary to consider phase sequence It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor MC in the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives Both ends of the MC should have an R C surge absorber Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration Please use voltage and current within the regulation s
108. run 4 No No No Set frequency or not Modify frequency Yes setting if upper bound freq C and setting freq is lower than the min output freq No Motor has malfunction Check if the setting of torque compensation is correct Check if there is any output voltage from terminals U V and No gt Check if the wiring of terminal FWD and between REV DCM is correct Yes Change switch or relay Correct connection if o Check if the parameter setting and wiring of analog signal and multi step speed are correct Change defective potentiometer and relay Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA Connect correctly Motor is locked due to large load please reduce load For example if there is a brake check if it is released no Increase the setting of torque compensation 5 6 CALL N Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 OW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed For VFD E C models no PLC function is supported Please follow the dashed line to skip the PLC parts m Modify the setting e If the executi time is tool If finishe executing PLC program Yes
109. sum For example reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H STX E Address 1 0 Address 0 T Function 1 0 Function 0 3 0 i Z Starting data address 0 4 F oO Number of data oO ZE LRC Check 1 F LRC Check 0 6 END 1 CR END 0 LF 01H 03H 04H 01H 00H 01H 0AH the 2 s complement negation of OAH is F6H RTU mode Address 01H Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 147 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 148 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Function 03H Starting data address 21H 02H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check is calculated by the following steps Step 1 Load a 16 bit register called CRC register with FFFFH Step 2 Exclusive OR the first 8 bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16 bit CRC register putting the result in the CRC register Step 3 Examine the LSB of CRC register Step 4 If the LSB of CRC register is 0 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling then repeat step 3 If the LSB of CRC register is 1 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H then repeat step 3 Step 5 Repe
110. the input power factor to When the mains power capacity is too large reduce harmonics and provide protection from line impedance will be small and the charge AC line disturbances surges switching current will be too high This may damage AC spikes short interruptions etc The AC line motor drive due to higher rectifier reactor should be installed when the power temperature supply capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity or the mains wiring distance lt 10m Correct wiring large capacity small capacity power reactor AC motor drive a DSA eys A E Y Y _ motor A Sa B 16 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 B 5 Zero Phase Reactor RF220X00A Dimensions are in millimeter and inch T T Recommended Wire Cable Size er Wirin Note 2 Nomina AWG mm mm lt 10 lt 5 3 lt 55 14 Diagran Single core Diagram lt 2 lt 33 6 lt 38 4 7 lt 12 lt 33 lt 35 1 ee Three core 5 lt 1 lt 42 4 lt 50 4 Seaan Note 600V Insulated unshielded Cable Diagram A Please wind each wire 4 times around the core The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible Zero Phase Reactor ori1 um _ ED Supsly S L2 viT2 s MOTOR OTIL3_ wit3 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14
111. the motor from overloading or overheating When the motor self cooled by fan operates in low frequency overload is seldom happened Refer to the following figure for the application aa When the rated current of motor is less than drive s or bad design of the motor heat dissipation it can use this parameter to limit the output current of the AC motor drive to prevent motor from overheating or damage aa Setting 0 the electronic thermal relay is used for standard motor heatsink is fixed on rotor shaft When operating in low speed the motor heat dissipation function will be bad Thus it needs to decrease the action time of the electronic thermal relay to ensure the motor life qg Setting 1 the electron thermal relay is used for special motor heatsink uses independent power The heat dissipation function has no direction relation with rotation speed Thus the electronic thermal relay is still held in low speed to ensure the motor load ability in low speed aa In the frequent power ON OFF applications it can t use this parameter even set to 0 or 1 for protection due to this function will be reset once the power is OFF Thus it needs to add the thermal relay on each motor when an AC motor drive is connected with several motors gq Setting 0 or 1 when the electronic thermal relay protection is enabled in low speed operation the AC motor drive will display OL1 and free run to stop It needs to press RESET to
112. tothe left lower bit M1022 Ok CELkhlooooooounni p10 arry i flag i D 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive API Mnemonic Operands Function 53 DHSCS S1 S2 D Compare for high speed counter Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OF x y m k H knx Kny Knm T c D DHSCs 13 steps S1 k 2 i D k k k Operands S1 Comparison Value S2 High speed counter C235 D Comparison result Explanations 1 It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse 2 To count automatically please set the target value by using DHSCS command and set M1028 On The counter C235 will be ON when the count number target value If you want to clear C235 please set M1029 ON Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 57 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 3 Please use rising edge falling edge command such as LDP LDF for the contact condition Please notice that error may occur when using contact A B for the contact condition There are three input modes for high speed counter in the following can be set by D1044 A B phase mode 4 times frequency D1044 0 user can input the A and B pulse for counting Make sure that A B and GND are grounding Pte Vi Count up all edges Count down all edg
113. when the potentiometer position is at mid point of its scale Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 85 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 50 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 200 Input gain Pr 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 5V 100 200 Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 200 Example 8 Use negative slope In this example the use of negative slope is shown Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure temperature or flow The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal 10V at high pressure or flow With negative slope settings the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction reverse This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 100 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 10V 100 100 OHz ov 10V Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 100 04 11 Minimum AVI Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0
114. 0 04 03 are used for those applications that use analog voltage signal to adjust the setting frequency Please refer to the following examples for the details of keypad potentiometer optional 0 10V or 10V Example 1 Standard application This is the most used setting The user only needs to set Pr 02 00 to 04 The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer GHz Cee eee pe Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 Bias adjustment 30Hz Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command OHz ov 5V 10V Example 2 Use of bias This example shows the influence of changing the bias When the input is OV the output frequency is 10 Hz At mid point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency To use the full potentiometer range please refer to Example 3 The value of external input voltage current 0 8 33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10 60Hz Thus the center of the keypad potentiometer is Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 83 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 40Hz and the value of external input voltage current 8 33 10V corresponds to the setting frequency 60Hz Please refer to example 3 for this part Pr 01 00 60Hz Ma
115. 0 1V to 510 0V 01 07 Output Frequency 0 1 to 120 0 110 0 Upper Limit Output Frequency 0 0 to100 0 01 08 ae Lower Limit 401 09 Accel Time 1 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 10 0 401 10 Decel Time 1 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 10 0 401 11 Accel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 10 0 401 12 Decel Time 2 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 10 0 01 13 Jog Acceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 10 Time 401 14 Jog Deceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 10 Time 01 15 Jog Frequency 0 10 Hz to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz Auto acceleration 01 16 deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting 4 4 0 Linear Accel Decel 1 Auto Accel Linear Decel 2 Linear Accel Auto Decel 3 Auto Accel Decel Set by load 4 Auto Accel Decel set by Accel Decel Time setting Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting Auto acceleration 5 Linear Accel controlled by current linear deceleration refer Decel 01 16 to Accel Decel time setting 6 Linear Accel controlled by current auto Decel 01 17 Acceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec w Curve 01 18 Deceleration 5 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec oo Curve i 0 Unit 0 1 sec 01 19 Decel Time 1 Unit 0 01 sec 01 20 De ay Time at OHz 0 00 to
116. 0 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 2 3 When it is running continuously E The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive kVA The requirement of load capacity kx P et ie capacity _of _AC_motor_drive kVA 1X coso The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive kx J3 xVu x Iu x10 lt the capacity_of _AC_motor_drive kVA E The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive A kxIm lt the_rated_current_of _AC_motor_drive A Symbol explanation Pu Motor shaft output for load kW n Motor efficiency normally approx 0 85 coso Motor power factor normally approx 0 75 Vum Motor rated voltage V Im Motor rated current A for commercial power k Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor 1 05 1 1 depending on PWM method Pci Continuous motor capacity kVA ks Starting current rated current of motor Nr Number of motors in parallel Ns Number of simultaneously started motors GD Total inertia GD calculated back to motor shaft kg m Ti Load torque tA Motor acceleration time N Motor speed Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 C 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 2 General Precaution Selection Note
117. 00 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 4 48 This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive If the setting is too large it may cause over current to damage motor or trigger the over current protection If the setting is too small it may cause insufficient motor torque The settings of Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 have to meet the condition of Pr 01 02 gt Pr 01 04 gt Pr 01 06 and Pr 01 01 gt Pr 01 03 gt Pr 01 05 By this condition V f curve is shown in the following figure In vector control mode Pr 00 10 is set to 1 Pr 01 03 Pr 01 04 and Pr 01 06 are disabled But Pr 01 05 is still the minimum output frequency The V f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 To set the voltage and frequency for each motor please refer to Pr 01 01 01 06 for motor 0 factory setting Pr 01 26 01 31 for motor 1 Pr 01 32 01 37 for motor 2 and Pr 01 38 01 43 for motor 3 Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid
118. 00 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Program Example Ladder diagram CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Command code Operation http Awww automatedpt com XO ANB X1 LD XO Load contact A of X0 x2 X3 ORI X2 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Block A Block B LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 OR X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel ANB Connect circuit block in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORB Parallel connection Multiple circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo x4 BlockA LD Xo Load contact A of X0 z k F Cu ANI x1 Connect to contact B of X1 in series ORB Block B LDI X2 Load contact B of X2 AND X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in series ORB Connect circuit block in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 D 33 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Explanations To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result the result operation pointer pluses 1 Mnemonic Function MRD Rea
119. 000 65535 display It will only display the first 3 digits The LED at the bottom right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the right most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X100 10000 5 When it is changed to PLC2 RS 485 will be used by PLC 6 When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode the function to reset all parameters to factory setting is disabled i e Pr 00 02 can t be set to 9 or 10 D 6 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 3 Ladder Diagram D 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram V Read input state from outside Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm it doesn t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately M100 X3 X10 HHD Execute in cycles X100 M505 f End V Send the result to the output point D 3 2 Introduction Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram a
120. 1 oo ee a Se 4 7 bit character gt 9 bit character frame _ gt i i i parity bit bit lt ____ 7 bit character _ gt 11 bit character frame ee o 1 2 3 4 5 Odd Stop stop i i i i i i parity bit bit lt _ _ 7 bit character 11 bit character frame p 11 bit character frame For RTU Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 141 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 8 N 2 l l Stop Stop 01723 4 56 T bit bit lt 8 bit character gt lt _ 11 bit character frame gt Even Stop parity bit 8 bit character _ i e 11 bit character frame gt Pie ee Odd Stop 0 1 2 3 4 parity pit ___ 8 bit character ___ _ 11 bit character frame p gt 8 N 1 i lt _ _ ___ 8 bit character _ gt i 10 bit character frame i i i i i i i Even Stop Stop Oe Ea D DE parity bit __bit lt lt amp bit character gt _ __ 12 bit character frame gt Odd Stop Stop a Ge Ct oe A T 7 pariy bit bit lt _____ 8 bit character gt i lt _ __ 12 bit character frame gt aa 3 Communication Proto
121. 1 10 and Pr 01 12 and then stops Coast the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped 1 It is recommended to use ramp to stop for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped The deceleration time has to be set accordingly 2 If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large it is recommended to select coast to stop For example blowers punching machines centrifuges and pumps qo Related parameters Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 2 a The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 61 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency Frequency output output frequency FecueHey motor motor speed speed Time
122. 1 14 CTL V2 14 4 183 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings 0 Digital keypad 1 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled Source of First AA 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication omman Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved 1 O to 10V from AVI Source of Second Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication Read Only BitO 1 by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 Display the Master iia Freq Command Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 Source Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command NOT for VFD E C models Read Only BitO 1 by Digital Keypad Display the Bit1 1 by RS485 communication Operation ae Command Source Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Bit3 1 by Multi input function Bit5 1 by CANopen communication Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 03 09 Reserved 03 10 Reserved 4 184 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW
123. 1 Attained Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Settings Factory Setting 0 00 co If a multi function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 1 Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 09 then the output will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr 03 02 setting If a multi function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 2 Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 23 then the output will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr 03 14 setting 4 74 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters oO Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Frequency master detection joensen eZ 7 4HZ range irequeney detection desired 4 2Hz range frequency ka DC brake time setting 2 master freq attained OFF ON OFF output signal setting 9 23 OFF ON OFF desired freq attained setting 03 zero speed indication ON OFF ON setting 19 zero speed indication ON OFF ON output timing chart of multiple function terminals Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication me NoTe When the output frequency reaches the setting frequency the detection ranges for the multi function output terminals are 2Hz from OFF to ON and 4Hz from ON to OFF The
124. 1 are set to 50Hz and Pr 01 02 will be set by Pr 00 12 60Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 01 are set to 60Hz and Pr 01 02 is set to 115V 230V or 460V a When Pr 00 02 1 all parameters are read only To write all parameters set Pr 00 02 0 When Pr 00 02 6 it clears all PLC program But this function is NOT for VFD E C models When the parameter settings are abnormal all parameters can be reset to factory setting by setting Pr 00 02 to 9 or 10 When Pr 00 02 9 all parameters are reset to factory setting for 50Hz users and voltage will be different by Pr 00 12 setting When Pr 00 02 10 all parameters are reset to factory setting for 60Hz users Related parameter Pr 00 12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection D DrA When Pr 00 02 9 or 10 all parameter are reset to factory setting but it doesn t clear all PLC program Only Pr 00 02 6 can clear all PLC program 00 03 X Start up Display Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx e505 2 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor E3 nienia 3 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models aa This parameter determines the start up display page after power is applied to the drive AR For setting 5 PLCO disable PLC1 run PLC PLC2 read write PLC programs into
125. 10V ACM Range 10 4 11 2VDC RPTC1 motor PTC overheat protection level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 14 RPTC2 motor PTC overheat warning level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 15 47kQ is AVI input impedance R1 resistor divider recommended value 1 20kQ An Take the standard PTC thermistor as example if protection level is 1330Q the voltage between 10V ACM is 10 5V and resistor divider R1 is 4 4kQ Refer to following calculation for Pr 07 14 setting 1330 47000 1330 47000 1330 47000 1293 4 10 5 1293 4 4400 1293 4 2 38 V 2 4 V Therefore Pr 07 14 should be set to 2 4 resistor value Q 1330 DEO ee ee i Tr N temperature C Tr 5C Tr 5 C Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 123 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 Related parameters Pr 02 00 Source of First Master Frequency Command Pr 02 09 Source of Second Frequency Command Pr 07 13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Pr 07 15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Pr 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level and Pr 07 17 Treatment of the Motor PTC Overheat 07 15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Unit V Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 1 2 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Unit V Settings 0 1 5 0V Factory Setting 0 6 0717 Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat Factory Setting 0
126. 12 Mov v Data Move 5 15 BMOV v Block move 7 Four Perform the addition of 7 v Fundamental 20 ADD BIN data Operations of Bar rane m Arithmetic a z erform the subtraction e SUB of BIN data D 44 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Steps API Codes K Function Command 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit Perform the T 22 MUL v multiplication of BIN data Perform the division of 7 v 23 DIV BIN data 24 INC _ y oe the addition of 3 25 DEC _ V Perform the subtraction 3 of 1 Rotation and 30 ROR v Rotate to the right 5 Displacement 34 ROL B v Rotate to the left 50 a 53 7 DHSCS x High speed counter 13 enable Control PID parameters 5 P v Special laaa FED of inverter command for AC motor Control frequency of 5 v drive 140 FREQ inverter 141 RPR v Read the parameter 9 142 WPR v Write the parameter 7 D 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands API Mnemonic Operands Function 10 CMP P S S2 D Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OP X Y MJ KY H KnX KnY KnM T C D CMP CMPP 7 steps sS 4 S 2 D
127. 12 can be used Please set one of MI3 MI12 MI7 MI12 are optional to 8 for JOG operation When the Jog command is ON the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 to Jog Frequency Pr 01 15 When the Jog command is OFF the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero gq The used Accel Decel time is set by the Jog Accel Decel time Pr 01 13 Pr 01 14 gq Before using the JOG command the drive must be stopped first And during Jog operation other operation commands are not accepted except commands via the FORWARD REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad 4 52 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency 01 15 JOG eee eee ae a eed es Frequency 01 05 Min output MEQUCNCY LV cet one hace gone whe edhe tee i lave ue 0 Hz JOG Accel Time JOG Decel Time 01 13 The definition of JOG Accel Decel Time Time 01 16 X Auto Acceleration Deceleration Factory Setting 0 Settings Linear acceleration deceleration Auto acceleration linear Deceleration Linear acceleration auto Deceleration Auto acceleration deceleration set by Accel Decel Time setting 0 1 2 3 Auto acceleration deceleration set by load 4 5 Linear Accel controlled by current linear Decel 6 L
128. 17 settings 1 Check the wiring of PG card 2 Try another PG card hig CANopen Guarding Time out Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus 1 41412 Only for VFDxxxExxC 6 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com PG signal error CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance c3 Ui _ CANopen SDO Time out Only for VFDxxxExxC CANopen SDO buffer overflow Only for VFDxxxExxC ra i 1 CAN Boot up fault Only for EM VEDxxxExxC Error communication protocol CPL of CANopen Only for VFDxxxExxC It will be displayed during deceleration when Pr 08 24 is not set to 0 and unexpected power off occurs such as momentary power loss D gt a r Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Abnormal Communication 1 Loop 2 Corrective Actions Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus Check if CANopen synchronous message is abnormal Check if command channels are full Too short time between commands please check SDO message sent from the master Reset CAN bus Check if it connects to terminal resistor Check if the signal is abnormal Check if the master is connected Check if the master is connected Reset CAN bus Check if the communication protocol is correct Set Pr 08 24 to 0 Check if the input power is stable Check if the
129. 2 E 1 1 CANopen Protocol cc c ecccecciceseseeteeeeneerseduheetescnecesdesteesesectensts E 2 E 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition eee ceeceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeees E 3 E 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set E 3 E 1 4 CANopen Communication Protocol E 4 E 1 4 1 NMT Network Management Object ee eeeeeeeereees E 4 E 1 4 2 SDO Service Data Object E 6 E 1 4 3 PDO Process Data Object E 7 E 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency Object cccecceeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeseeaeees E 9 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com E 2 How to Control by CANOPEN o 0 ee eeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeenenaees E 13 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation In order to retain the warranty coverage the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time Storage conditions are SSG Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes Store within an ambient temperature range of 20 C to 60 C Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA Oe ON DO NOT place on the ground directly It should be stored properly Moreover
130. 2 When the speed searches upward it will accelerate by V f curve Maximum Allowable Maximum Power Power Loss Time Allowable Power Input A Speed Synchronization Speed Search Berean 08 04 1 08 04 2 Output Baseblock Time Baseblock Time Frequency F 08 06 F 08 06 Output ne o r Momentary Power Loss Operation Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit Hz Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit Hz Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit Hz Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit Hz Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit Hz EAEE Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 og These parameters are used to set the frequencies that are inhibited to operate This function can be used to prevent the resonance generated from the original frequency of the machines Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 131 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters It keeps the drive from running at the resonance frequency of machinery or load system or other inhibition frequency There are three frequency areas can be set These parameters set the Skip Frequencies It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output These six parameters should be set as follows Pr 08 09 gt Pr 08 10 gt Pr 08 11 gt Pr 08 12 gt Pr 08 13 gt Pr 08 14 When it is
131. 3A 43C 4 148 1500W 690 125 690 145 11 VFD110E43A 43C 6 186 2000W 530 108 530 20 15 VFD150E43A 43C 8 248 4800W 320 BR1K2W008 4 151 310 25 18 5 VFD185E43A 43C 10 281 4800W 320 BR1K2W008 4 121 310 30 22 VFD220E43A 43C 12 338 4800W 320 BR1K2W008 4 100 310 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 2 E gt 10 Please select the brake unit and or brake resistor according to the table means no Delta product Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta the warranty will be void Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load Use the contact to switch power off to the AC motor drive When using more than 2 brake units equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can t be less than the value in the column Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive the right most column in the table Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thor
132. 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Parameter value 09 programs a Multi function Input Terminals for external Base Block control NOTE When a Base Block signal is received the AC motor drive will block all output and the motor will free run When base block control is deactivated the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed and then accelerate to Master Frequency external External Base base 9 Block block synchronous speed Refer to Pr 08 06 output Speedsearch starts detection frequency with last frequency command en A B B time g 08 07 speed search UP Increase Increase decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active When both inputs are active at the same time the Master Frequency ia DOWN Decrease increase decrease is halted Please refer to Pr 02 07 02 08 This Master Frequency function is also called motor potentiometer Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi function Input i Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to increment the AC 12 Counter Trigger drive s internal counter When an input is received the counter is incremented by 1 When active the counter is reset and inhibited To enable counting the input should be OFF Refer to Pr 03 05 and 03 06 13 Counter Reset Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 91 CA
133. 5 02 230 23P 0 110 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 320 2002 VFDO02E21T 23T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 320 2009 VFDO04E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 2502 BR200W250 0 5 04 23C 23P 0 216 BUE 20015 1 1 170 1029 VFD004E21T 23T 200W 2500 BR200W250 1 170 1000 VFDO07E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 1502 g 1 07s 23ci23P 0497 BUE 20015 1 BR200W150 1 140 809 VFD007E21T 23T 200W 1509 BR200W150 1 140 800 a VFDO15E21A 21C 300W 852 125 400 3 2 1 5 VFDO1SE23T 0 849 300W 859 125 800 A VFD015E23A 23C 23P 300W 85N BUE 20015 1 125 800 3 2 2 VFD022E21A 21C 23A 23C 1 262 600W 500 120 400 5 3 7 VFD037E23A 23C 2 080 600W 500 107 400 7 5 5 5 VFD055E23A 23C 3 111 800W 37 50 85 340 10 7 5 VFD075E23A 23C 4 148 1200W 250 90 240 145 11 VFD110E23A 23C 6 186 1200W 80 BR1K2W008 2 100 80 20 15 VFD150E23A 23C 8 248 3000W 100 BR1K5W005 2 119 100 05 04 VFDO04E43A 43C 43P 0 216 sow 4000 BUE 40015 1 BR300W400 1 400 4000 VFDO04E43T 300W 4000 BR300W400 1 400 4000 1 0 75 MEDOOTESSAI43C 43P 0 427 200W 4009 BUE 40015 1 BR300W400 1 200 2009 VFDO07E43T 300W 4007 BR300W400 1 200 2002 2 45 VED015E43A7430 43P ogag 400W 3000 BUE 40015 1 BR200W150 2 140 1600 8 gt VFDO15E43T i 400W 3002 BR200W150 2 140 1600 amp _ 3 22 VFD022E43A 43C 1 262 600W 2000 BR300W400 2 140 1400 gt 5 37 VFD037E43A 43C 2 080 750W 1400 125 960 Q 75 5 5 VFD055E43A 43C 3 111 1100W 960 120 960 10 7 5 VFD075E4
134. 5 RA5 MO6 RA6 MO7 RA7 The Analog Output Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 BitO 1 AFM used by PLC Bit1 1 AO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC aa The equivalent 1 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog output The value that Pr 03 10 displays is the result after converting 1 bit binary into decimal value Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 79 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 2 1 0 2 2 2 O not used Weights 1 Used by PLC Bit 2 1 0 arm AO1 optional AO2 optional For Example If Pr 03 10 displays 1 it means that AFM is used by PLC 03 11 Brake Release Frequency Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 20 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 a Brake Engage Frequency Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 20 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals Relay or MO1 by setting Pr 03 00 03 01 BA When Pr 03 00 03 01 is set to 21 the multi function output terminal will be activated when the output frequency reaches Pr 03 11 When the AC motor drive stops and the output frequency reaches Pr 03 12 this multi function output terminal will be activated aa Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi func
135. 50Hz Wall mounted Enclosed Type IP20 n Output Rating Environment Protection Power Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 7 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 1 3 Dimensions for Brake Unit Dimensions are in millimeter inch JHA WHE B 8 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 1 4 DIN Rail Installation Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 9 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories CALL NOW 800 985 6929 B 2 No fuse Circuit Breaker Chart http Awww automatedpt com For 1 phase 3 phase drives the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2 4 times rated input current 1 phase 3 phase Recommended Recommended Model no fuse Model no fuse breaker A breaker A VFD002E11A 11T 11C 15 VFD002E23A 23C 23T 5 11P 23P VFD002E21A 21T 21C 10 VFD004E23A 23C 23T 5 21P 23P VFDO04E11A 11C 11T 20 VFD004E43A 43C 43T 5 11P 43P VFD004E21A 21C 21T 15 VFD007E23A 23C 23T 10 21P 23P VFDO007E11A 11C 30 VFD007E43A 43C 43T 5 43P VFDO07E21A 21C 21T 20 VFD015E23A 23C 23T 20 21P 23P VFD015E21A 21C 30 VFD015E43A 43C 43T 10 43P VFD022E21A 21C 50 VFD022E23A 23C 30 VFD022E43A 43C 15 VFD037
136. 600 00 sec for Simple Position Delay Time at 10Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 21 for Simple Position 01 22 Delay Time at 20Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec i for Simple Position r oo Delay Time at 30Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 23 z i for Simple Position Delay Time at 40Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 24 p for Simple Position Delay Time at 50Hz 0 00 to 600 00 sec 01 25 ni for Simple Position Maximum Voltage 01 26 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Motor 1 Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 220 0 01 27 Voltage Vmax Motor 1 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 440 0 Mid Point 01 28 Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 Motor 1 50 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 01 29 mid Motor 1 Vmid Motor 1 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Minimum Output 01 30 Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 1 01 31 Minimum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Explanation Maximum Voltage 01 32 Frequency Fbase Motor 2 Maximum Output 01 33 Voltage Vmax Motor 2 Mid Point 01 34 Frequency Fmid Motor 2 Mid Point Voltage vee Vmid Motor 2 Minimum Output 01 36 Frequency Fmin Motor 2 Minimum Output 01 37 Voltage Vmin Motor 2 Maximum Voltage 01 38 Frequency Fbase Motor 3 Maximum
137. 7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Example 5 Use of negative bias in noisy environment In this example a 1V negative bias is used In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin 1V in this example Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command gt Gain 100 Negative bias 6Hz ye 1v 10V Bias adjustment 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 Example 6 Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range In this example a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached Bias adjustment pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq vy Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 111 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command 60Hz Gain 10V 9V 100 111 10V Bias adjustment 6 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 OIN _ OH Negative bias 6 6Hz Example 7 Use of 0 10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction In this example the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction The motor will be idle
138. 7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 27 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories 59 7 2 35 57 3 2 26 4 i f Seach 72 2 2 84 35 8 1 41 3 5 0 14 UNIT mm inch B 10 1 2 Wiring and Settings Refer to following diagram for details MACiagdress D te Rats Setting baud rate Setting MAC addresses 125K use decimal system OTT l oa povi RDS dm gi gt ay sO SSS s i BAUD T CEY ADD1 ADD2 Switch Baud i ze Value Rate nnn Hi ESE Me gi ahi 8 Recerved 0 125K i t Reeva A i y 1 250K v can EMP IcaNt v 2 500K Other AUTO B 10 1 3 Mounting Method Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto VFD E The dimension on the left hand side is for your reference B 28 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com i CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Dimensions STEP 1 STEP 2 mn mopa UNIT mm inch B 10 1 4 Power Supply No external power is needed Power is supplied via RS 485 port that is connected to VFD E An 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with this communication module is used to co
139. 8 RJ 45 pin definition for VFD E C models PIN Signal Description 1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line dominant high 2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line dominant low 3 CAN_GND Ground OV V 4 SG 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V Sua 1 The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions 2 Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled off net in front of the terminal 3 Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube 4 Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage 5 The AC motor drive motor and wiring may cause interference To prevent the equipment damage please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment 6 When the AC drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 respectively To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation switch over any of the two motor leads 2 10 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 7 With long motor cables high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over current high leakage cur
140. 85 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example 10 Delay Circuit T10 i C 2 oe ae a ee i k TB 0 1 sec 100 seconds When input XO is ON output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds K1000 0 1 seconds 100 seconds once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON Please refer to timing chart above Example 11 Output delay circuit in the following example the circuit is made up of two timers No matter input X0 is ON or OFF output Y4 will be delay it T5 T6 E m Cy4 T5 Y4 A 5 seconds gt l te 3 seconds Example12 Extend Timer Circuit In this circuit the total delay time from input TMR T11 Kn1 mmr Tn km X0 is close and output Y1 is ON n1 n2 T T11 where T is clock period T12 v xo T11 T12 YA Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 17 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 PLC Devices CALL NOW 800 985 6929 D 4 1 Summary of DVP PLC Device Number http Awww automatedpt com Items Specifications Remarks Control Method Stored program cyclic scan system I O Processing Method Batch processing when END instruction is executed I O refresh instruction is available Exec
141. 85 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E11A 21A VFD004E11A 21A VFD007E21A VFD002E11C 21C VFD004E11C 21C VFDO007E21C VFD002E11P 21P VFD004E11P 21P VFD007E21P BR prake resistor optional i BUE brake unit optional Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker AN k Motor R L1 OR L1 U T1 x S L2 S L2 VTJ IM Recommended Circuit W T3 A 3 Z when powersupply TOE Sr is turned OFF bya E L fault output J SA If the fault occurs the y MC RB RA contact will be ON to Multi function contact output turn off the power and d 5 RC Refer to chapter 2 4 for details protect the power system OFF ON Mc RB Factory setting is f malfunction indication 24V RG FWD Stop Factory setting ji REV St MI1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode op A MI2 y gt Drive is in operation Vi Factory Multi step 1 MI3 qes 48V50mA Max w i t T setting lt Multi step 2 6 MI4 Multi function PNP i Phot Iper Output Please refer to Figure 7 Multi step 3 gt MI5 MCM PAR Pst Sane far WITING OF NEN Multi step 4 MI6 AFM Analog Multi function Output Digital Signal Common Terminal mode g g el DCM factory setting Analog freq gt current meter 0 10VDC 2mA OF ACM EAT Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency 10V fees 3 Power sup
142. 9 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 10 3 1 Panel Appearance Address Switches NETLED SPLED NETSP we wn OME PBOT t Jul 3 RS 485 RJ45 i 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND W W 4 SG if I SS i 5 SG be A 6 Reserved i p 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Ki Profibus DP Interface DB9 SP LED Indicating the connection status between VFD E and CME PD01 NET LED Indicating the connection status between CME PD01 and PROFIBUS DP Address Switches Setting the address of CME PD01 on PROFIBUS DP network RS 485 Interface RJ45 Connecting to VFD E and supply power to CME PD01 aego p PROFIBUS DP Interface DB9 9 PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS DP network 6 Extended Socket 4 PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS DP network B 32 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 10 3 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 57 3 2 26 59 7 2 35 LP l UNIT mm inch B 10 3 3 Parameters Settings in VFD E VFD E Baud Rate 9600 Pr 09 01 1 RTU 8 N 2 Pr 09 04 3 Freq Source Pr 02 00 4 Command Source Pr 02 01 3 B 10 3 4 Power Supply The power of CME PD01 is supplied from VFD E Please connect VFD E to CME PD01 by using 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with CME PD01 After connecti
143. 9 to 100 0 100 0 a Percentage 42 06 Min ACI2 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA pao Current 12 07 Min ACI2 Scale 0 0 to 100 0 poo Percentage Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 29 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Setting 0 Max ACI2 Scale 12 09 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 0 Disabled Source of the 1st frequency Al2 Function Source of the 2nd frequency Selection PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback 12 08 Max ACI2 Input 9 9 to 20 0mA Current i 12 12 Min AVI4 Input 0 0 to 10 0V Voltage 42 143 Min AVI4 Scale 0 0 to 100 0 Percentage 12 144 Max AVI4 Input 0 0 to 10 0V 10 Voltage Max AVI4 Scale 12 15 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 12 16 Min ACI3 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA Current 12 17 Mn ACI3 Scale 0 0 to 100 0 wf Percentage 12 148 Max ACIS Input 0 0 to 20 0mA w Current 12 149 Max ACI3 Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 Percentage 0 AVO1 AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO1 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO1 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA AO1 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 12 22 A91 Analog Output 4 to 200 100 J 4 30 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Al2 Analog Signal ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode 4 AVI4 an
144. A Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Settings 0 0 5 0 Factory Setting 0 0 aa In V f control mode the drift current may cause slight motor vibration in the slip compensation or torque compensation It can be ignored if this slight vibration doesn t affect the application AR The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will cause serious motor vibration It is recommended to use this parameter the recommended value is 2 0 to improve this situation greatly AR The drift current zone of the high power motors is usually in the low frequency area an It is recommended to set to more than 2 0 08 21 OOB Sampling Time Unit second Settings 0 1 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 08 22 Number of OOB Sampling Times Settings 0 00 to 32 Factory Setting 20 08 23 OOB Average Sampling Angle Settings Read only Factory Setting an The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with PLC for washing machine When multi function input terminal is enabled MI 26 it will get A9 value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t A0 value Pr 08 23 When A9 value is large it means unbalanced load At this moment it needs to lower the frequency command by PLC or the host controller On the other hand it can be high speed operation An Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal
145. AC motor drive AR Please refer to Pr 00 04 for multi function display an Related parameter Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 39 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 00 04 X Content of Multi function Display Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx meu 1 Display the counter value which counts the number of ea pulses on TRG terminal c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C owes NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC ARA motor drive u 4 Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U T1 a ag V T2 W T3 to the motor E LL LIJ 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value in b Seen 6 Display the power factor angle in of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 to the motor n Display the output power in kW of terminals U V and W Paaa n to the motor P Tuo 8 Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates Pp rw to current t Cu Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal in V I nn U ous 10 Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in mA or iy display the signal of AVI2 analog input terminal in V i A oj 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h in C 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level I 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display mo
146. AR This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc Motor Rated Current Motor 1 Unit A Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA 07 19 Motor No load Current Motor 1 Unit A Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA 07 20 X Torque Compensation Motor 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 1 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 1 Unit mQ Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 07 23 Motor Rated Slip Motor 1 Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Motor Pole Number Motor 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Motor Rated Current Motor 2 Unit A Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA 07 26 Motor No load Current Motor 2 Unit A Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA 07 27 X Torque Compensation Motor 2 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 2 Unit mQ Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Motor Pole Number Motor 2 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 Unit A Settings 30
147. Abnormal 2 ccceceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeea 5 5 5 8 Phase Loss PHL pieiet eia a 5 5 5 9 Motor Cannot RUM krease a aana ene A aa ARS ERAN EAER 5 6 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed 00 0 eeceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 5 7 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration eeeee eenen 5 8 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected l enn 5 8 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise 0 00 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeens 5 9 5 14 Environmental Condition eceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaeeeeeenaees 5 9 5 15 Affecting Other Machines eee eeeceeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeeesnaeeeeeeeaas 5 10 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance cs10e0 6 1 6 1 Fault Code Information eee ceeeeseeeeeeneeeeenneeeeeeeeeesnneeeeeenaeeeenenaees 6 1 6 1 1 Common Problems and Solutions eccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 1 6 1 2 ReSetiv 24 Helene ae lee a eee 6 6 6 2 Maintenance and INSPeCtiONS eee eeeceeeeeeeeceeneeeeneeeeeeenaeeeenenaees 6 6 Appendix A Specifications ceecccccceceeeeeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeneeeeeeees A 1 Appendix B Accessories ccccccececececeeeceeecececeeeeeseseceseseseaeaeseseseaeseseaeaees B 1 B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives B 1 B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
148. B Block in parallel ORB none Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com D 9 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function http www automatedpt com Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment MPS Multiple output MRD none MPP C_ Output command of coil drive OUT Y M S Basic command Application Application basic command command command _ and application Please refer to command Inverse logic INV none D 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line the right power line will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft After editing a row go to editing the next row The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts If you need more than 11 contacts you could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly The drawing is shown as follows XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 CO C1 HHH HHHH HIE 00000 wowa vo Row Number The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner The output handling including the operation frame of coil and application command at the most right side in ladder diagram Take the following diagram for exampl
149. C drive of address 16 FEH AC drive of address 254 For example communication to AMD with address 16 decimal 10H ASCII mode Address 1 0 gt 1 31H 0 30H RTU mode Address 10H 3 3 Function Function code and DATA data characters The format of data characters depends on the function code 03H read data from register 06H write single register 08H loop detection Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 143 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters CALL NOW 800 985 6929 10H write multiple registers http Awww automatedpt com The available function codes and examples for VFD E are described as follows 1 03H multi read read data from registers Example reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H AMD address is 01H 4 144 ASCII mode Command message STX E 0 Address ZE 0 Function 3 oy Starting data T address 0 7 T Number of data 0 count by word 0 oy LRC Check D CR END LF RTU mode Command message Address 01H Function 03H Starting data 21H address 02H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H 2 06H single write write sing Example writing data 6000 1770H to register 0100H AMD address is 01H ASCII mode Response message
150. C motor drive may emit the electrical noise The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference Radio Frequency Interference on the power line Main power isolated from earth If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power IT power the RFI jumper must be cut off Then the RFI capacities filter capacitors will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage according to IEC 61800 3 and reduce earth leakage current ANa 1 After applying power to the AC motor drive do not cut off the RFI jumper Therefore please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper 2 The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1 000V Besides electro magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth 4 The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi pot tests are performed The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high 5 To prevent drive damage the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system or a corner grounded TN system 1 1 5 Remove Instructions Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 7 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http A
151. CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com DELTA ELECTRONICS INC i M a mu N i l Mie User Manual AA s High Pertormance Flexible Options Micro Type AC Motor Drives _ Power Range 1 phase 115V series 0 2 0 75kW 0 25 1HP 1 phase 230V series 0 2 2 2kW 0 25 3HP 3 phase 230V series 0 2 15kW 0 25 20HP 3 phase 460V series 0 4 22kW 0 50 30HP CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Preface Thank you for choosing DELTA s high performance VFD E Series The VFD E Series is manufactured with high quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available This manual is to be used for the installation parameter setting troubleshooting and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive To guarantee safe operation of the equipment read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference To ensure the safety of operators and equipment only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation start up and maintenance Always read this manual thoroughly before using VFD E series AC Motor Drive especially the WARNING DANGER and CAUTION notes Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage If you have any questions please contact your dealer PLEASE READ PRIOR TO IN
152. CM 0 10VDC 2mA Analog Signal common EAT g Sig Factory setting output 10V frequency 7 3 Power supply RS 485 serial interface a On 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models ode 5KQ 2 lt AVI 1 Reserved AVI Master Frequency ZEV l fsz 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 3 GND AGI A es ts cok ACI 4 SG ACIAVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V A SE TO a er 8 1 7 Reserved Analog Signal Common L E 8 Reserved 7 For VFD E C models please refer to figure 8 M 2 6 ain circuit power terminals Control circuit terminals Revision Oct 2009 0 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Shielded leads amp Cable 7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Figure 5 for models of VFD E Series http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring VFD002E11T 21T VFD004E11A 21T VFDO07E21T Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 7 S L2 Recommended Circuit when power supply is turned OFF bya fault output A If the fault occurs the l i contact will be ON to MC turn off the power and protect the power system OFF ON e FWD Stop Factory setting NPN Mode REV Stop NPN Factory e Multi step 1 4 sw setting Multi step 2 PNP i Please refer to Figure 7 e Multi step 3 for wiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP mode Digital Signal Common Li Factory setting ACI Mode AVI s2 1 ACI nal a ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indic
153. CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Diagram B Please put all wires through 4 cores in series without winding Zero Phase Reactor Power Supply Note 1 The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i e the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors Note 2 Only the phase conductors should pass through not the earth core or screen Note 3 When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated emissions from the cable B 17 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 6 Remote Controller RC 01 Dimensions are in millimeter i t rm Qe REV RUN JOG FWD STOP RESET Pee 15 4 re rs r473 lt Rc otTerminai ioc ee ee p ona M16 lt VFD E 1 0 block VFD E Programming Pr 02 00 set to 2 Pr 02 01 set to 1 external controls Pr 04 04 set to 1 setting Run Stop and Fwd Rev controls Pr 04 07 MI5 set to 5 External reset Pr 04 08 MI6 set to 8 JOG operation B 18 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com B 7 PU0O6 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix B Accessories B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD PU06 Frequency Comman
154. Consider external forced motor cooling When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time the output load must be decreased The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows Load duty cycle 50 f 7 continuous torq 36 20 60 Frequency Hz If 100 continuous torque is required at low speed it may be necessary to use a special inverter duty motor Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed exceeds the rated speed 60Hz of a standard motor Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 C 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 7 Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply drives the motor Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series pay attention to the following motor vibration problems Resonant mechanical vibration anti vibration damping rubbers should be used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed Motor imbalance special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency To avoid resonances use the Skip frequencies The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz Special motors C 6 1 Pole changing Dahlander
155. Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight kg 12 Voltage Class 230V Class Max Applicable Motor Output 0 2 04 0 75 15 22 37 55 75 11 15 kW 5 i x Rated Output Capaciy va 06 10 16 20 a2 65 os zs ia 25 D 5 Rated Output Curent A 65 Maximum Output Voltage V 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage 4 Output Frequency Hz 0 1 600 Hz i Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 Single 3 phase 3 phase 2 4 9 1 9 6 5 2 7 Ee 15 7 9 24 15 20 6 26 F 48 70 t Single 3 phase 3 phase 200 240 V 50 60Hz 200 240V 50 60Hz 2 10 180 264 V E 5 47 63 HD Cooling Method Fan Cooling Weight kg 6 6 NOTE the weight for VFD015E23P is 1 2kg Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix A Specifications Voltage Class Model Number VFD XXXE Max Applicable Motor Output kW Max Applicable Motor Output hp Rated Output Capacity kVA Rated Output Current A Ma ximum Output Voltage V Output Rating Output Frequency Hz Carrier Frequency kHz ed Input Current A Ra Rated Voltage Frequency Input Rating Vol Frequency Tolerance Cooling Method Weight kg tage Tolerance CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com 460V Class oe oor oe oe ow os ore v0 o as a fox or ve 22 or os rem e ws fos ve 20 so so re w m fe on fos ow oe
156. D X1 x1 kK CNT co K5 CNT CO K5 co OUT YO 1 When X0 On RST command is X0 executed CO reset to 0 and output contact reset to Off 2 When X1 is from Off to On G p f counter will count up add 1 K5 CO contact is On and CO present setting K5 CO won t accept X1 value trigger signal and CO remains K5 I I l 3 When counter CO attains settings co 1 I I I Contacts YO CO 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter C235 1 Setting range of 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter is K 2 147 483 648 K2 147 483 647 2 The settings can be positive negative numbers by using constant K or data register D special data register D1000 D1044 is not included If using data register D the setting will occupy two continuous data register The total band width of high speed counter that VFD E supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse input D 4 7 Register Types There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following 1 General The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN register to STOP or power is off 2 Special Each special register has the special definition and purpose It is used register to save system status error messages monitor state Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 23 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use P
157. DCM or apply power 0 10Vdc to AVI DCM as shown in figure 3 1 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 3 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 Setting the potentiometer or AVI DCM 0 10Vdc power to less than 1V 4 Setting MI1 On for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running you should set MI2 On And if you want to decelerate to stop please set MI1 MI2 Off Check following items Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration SEE GS Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad please operate by the following steps Cc rar Gii ou m gt correctly e T 2 After applying the power verify that LED y l Hana B display shows F 0 0Hz oe v 3 Set Pr 02 00 0 and Pr 02 01 0 Refer to v o oW v woe Ap Appendix B operation flow for detail 1 Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive 4 Press ne key to set frequency to around 5Hz 5 Press key for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running you should press EF in a eve page And if you want to v STOP y kiii woe CA decelerate to stop please press Runo me A key E K 6 Check following items cone E Check if the motor direction of rot
158. E23A 23C 40 VFD037E43A 43C 20 VFD055E23A 23C 50 VFD055E43A 43C 30 VFD075E23A 23C 60 VFD075E43A 43C 40 VFD110E23A 23C 100 VFD110E43A 43C 50 VFD150E23A 23C 150 VFD150E43A 43C 70 VFD185E43A 43C 80 VFD220E43A 43C 100 B 10 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 3 Fuse Specification Chart Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted 1 A I A Line Fuse Model Input Output I A Bussmann P N VFD002E11A 11T 11C 6 1 6 15 JJN 15 11P VFD002E21A 21T 21C 4 9 1 6 10 JJN 10 121P VFD002E23A 23C 23T 1 9 1 6 5 JJN 6 23P VFDO04E11A 11C 11T 9 2 5 20 JJN 20 11P VFDO004E21A 21C 21T 6 5 2 5 15 JJN 15 121P VFD004E23A 23C 23T 2 7 2 5 5 JJN 6 123P VFD004E43A 43C 43T 1 9 1 5 5 JJS 6 143P VFD007E11A 11C 18 4 2 30 JJN 30 VFD007E21A 21C 21T 9 7 4 2 20 JJN 20 121P VFD007E23A 23C 23T 5 1 4 2 10 JJN 10 123P VFD007E43A 43C 43T 3 2 2 5 5 JJS 6 43P VFD015E21A 21C 15 7 7 5 30 JJN 30 VFD015E23A 23C 23T 9 7 5 20 JJN 20 23P VFD015E43A 43C 43T 4 3 4 2 10 JJS 10 43P VFD022E21A 21C 24 11 50 JJN 50 VFD022E23A 23C 15 11 30 JJN 30 VFD022E43A 43C 7 1 5 5 15 JJS 15 VFD037E23A 23C 20 6 17 40 JJN 40 VFD037E43A 43C 11 2 8 2 20 JJS 20
159. EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 9 Extension Card For details please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download from our website http www delta com tw industrialautomation Installation method B 9 1 Relay Card EME R2CA Relay Output EME R3AA Relay Output Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 25 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 9 2 Digital I O Card EME D33A B 9 3 Analog I O Card EME A22A B 9 4 Communication Card CME USB01 B 26 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories connect to extension card connect to PC fl B 9 5 Speed Feedback Card EME PGO1 gT S 2 4 ty Ei Q N B 10 Fieldbus Modules B 10 1 DeviceNet Communication Module CME DN01 B 10 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions 1 For RS 485 connection to VFD E 2 Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3 Address selector 4 Baud rate selector 5 Three LED status indicators for monitor Refer to the figure below Revision Oct 2009 0
160. EV RUN STOP DCM 4 88 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 04 04 N 3 wire External Terminal STOP RUN L MI1 MI3 MI2 CLOSE RUN OPEN STOP OPEN FWD CLOSE REV REV FWD DCM Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Factory Setting 1 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal M14 Factory Setting 2 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Factory Setting 3 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Factory Setting 4 Settings Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they 0 No Function have no effect on operation Multi Step Speed 1 Command 1 These four inputs select the multi speed defined by Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table P Multi Step Speed Command 2 NOTE Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 can also be used to control output 3 Multi Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive s internal PLC Command 3 function There are 17 step speed frequencies including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency to select for j Multi Step Speed application Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad After faults such as O H O C and O V are cl
161. H1 to the address H2000 of the VFD E i e stop the AC motor drive 5 When data is written successfully M1017 will be ON D 60 D10 H2001 WPRP H2 H2000 M2 WPRP H2000 M1017 D Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 141 FPID P S1 S2 S3 S4 PID control for the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x y m k H knx kny Knm T c D FPID FPIDP 9 steps S1 k S2 kaa S3 k S4 Operands S1 PID Set Point Selection 0 4 2 Proportional gain P 0 100 3 Integral Time I 0 10000 4 Derivative control D 0 100 Explanation As This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly including Pr 10 00 PID set point selection Pr 10 02 Proportional gain P Pr 10 03 Integral time I and Pr 10 04 Derivative control D Program Example Assume that when MO ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled S2 0 S3 1 unit 0 01 seconds and S4 1 unit 0 01 seconds Assume that when M1 ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled S2 1 unit 0 01 S3 0 and S4 0 Assume that when M2 ON S1 is set to 1 frequency is inputted by digital keypad S2 1 unit 0 01 S3
162. HK MOV KO M101 MOV D1044 M102 MOV D1044 MO M1018 4 DHSCS H10050 C235 M1 M1018 t DHSCS H3 C235 M3 M2 D1044 M3 M10 n Gaiozs M1000 API Mnemonic Operands Function 139 RPR P 1 S2 Read the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oP x y mM KJ H kKnx kny Knm T c D RPR RPRP 5 steps S1 2 i Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 59 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use Operands CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com PLC Function S1 Data address for reading S2 Register that saves the read data API Mnemonic Operands Function 140 WPR P 1 S2 Write the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x yY m K H Knx kny Knm T c D WPR WPRP 5 steps S1 S2 k Operands S1 Data address for writing S2 Register that saves the written data Program Example 1 Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the VFD E into DO and H2101 into D1 2 When MO ON it will write the data in D10 to the address H2001 of the VFD E When M1 ON it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the VFD E i e start the AC motor drive 4 When M2 ON it will write the data in
163. LC Function D 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays Special 5 Read R M Function Write W Normally open contact a contact This contact is On when running and it is M1000 On when the status is set to RUN R Normally closed contact b contact This contact is Off in running and it is Off M1001 when the status is set to RUN On only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get positive M1002 pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period Off only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get negative M1008 pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period M1004 Reserved M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives M1006 Output frequency is 0 M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives FWD 0 REV 1 M1008 Reserved M1009 Reserved M1010 Reserved M1011 10ms clock pulse 5ms On 5ms Off M1012 100ms clock pulse 50ms On 50ms Off M1013 1s clock pulse 0 5s On 0 5s Off M1014 1min clock pulse 30s On 30s Off M1015 Frequency attained M1016 Parameter read write error M1017 Succeed to write parameter M1018 Enable high speed counter function When M1028 On M1019 Reserved M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag M1022 Carry flag DID D D D D D D D D D D D M1023 Divisor is 0 M1024 Reserved M1025 RUN ON S
164. LL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com 4 114 Chapter 4 Parameters 300 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com 1 F 60Hzor above F 40Hz i i F 20Hz i i F 50Hz t i 250 i t l l A 200 l g i l 3 y l a L T E 150 i 2 E o Q fe 100 50 o o 50 100 150 200 Load factor Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Present Fault Record Second Most Recent Fault Record Third Most Recent Fault Record Fourth Most Recent Fault Record ae Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Factory Setting 0 Readings 0 No fault 1 Over current oc 2 Over voltage ov 3 IGBT Overheat 0H1 4 Power Board Overheat oH2 5 Overload oL 6 Overload oL1 7 Motor Overload oL2 8 External Fault EF 9 Hardware protection failure HPF 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 13 Reserved 14 Phase loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software password protection codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ Failure cF2 0 20
165. LL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to be External Fault E F inputs voltage frequency setting frequency 14 External Fault Time Mlx GND ON OFF CON Reset ON OFF operation ON command PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON the PID function will be disabled disabled AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of these settings is enabled If the status of terminal is changed AC motor drive will restart from OHz voltage frequency setting 16 Output Shutoff Stop frequency Time MIx GND ON OFF ON operation ON command i Parameter lock When this setting is enabled all parameters will be locked and enable write parameters is disabled 4 92 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Operation ON Operation command via Ext Terminals Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 18 Selection Pr 02 01 setting external When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the terminals priority should be setting 18 gt setting19
166. LL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 72 A 100 25 with mounting method A 15 C with mounting method B 9 3 fo 80 35 C with mounting method A 5 25 C with mounting method B 5 70 o 50 C with mounting method A 3 60 40 C with mounting method B o a 50 40 gt Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14kHz15kHz Frequency 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 460V Series Setting 1 to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s life and also prevent carrier change and motor noise due to surrounding temperature and frequently load change it needs to use this setting Please refer to the following figure for the selection of carrier frequency and rated current For example when carrier frequency should be kept in 15Hz the rated current of the AC motor drive must be 65 That means the rated current for over load is 150 65 97 5 Thus the rated current should be within the range of the following figure to keep the carrier frequency at a fix frequency Related parameter Pr 02 03 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections 1008 E La 95 7 90 hg 85 80 7 T5 i 70 ii 65 7 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Carrier frequency kHz Rated current Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapte
167. N STOP 3 wire operation No function Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 ua Multi Step speed command 3 2 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset ua ae Accel Decel inhibit Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation oO oo nN Do a A WO DN External base block 10 Up Increment master frequency 11 Down Decrement master frequency Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 2 Counter Trigger Signal Counter reset E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 NOT for VFD E C models 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 BitO MI1 Bit1 MI2 Bit2 MI3 Bit3 Ml4 Bit4 MI5 Bit5 MI6 Bit6 MI7 Multi function Input ee Contact Selection Bit7 MI8 Bit8 MI9 Bit9 MI10 Bit10 MI11 Bit11 MI12 0 N O 1 N C P S
168. NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands i Please check if READY LED is ON when power is applied Check if the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KPE LE02 a It should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to Fault Code Information and Maintenance for solution Please do WARNING NOT touch output terminals U V W when power is still applied to L1 R L2 S L3 T even when the AC motor drive has stopped The DC link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels even if the power has been turned off 3 1 Keypad There are three LEDs on the keypad LED READY It will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off LED RUN It will light up when the motor is running LED FAULT It will light up when fault occurs Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 3 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 2 Operation Method The operation method can be set via communication control terminals and optional keypad KPE LE02 RS485 port RJ 45 It needs to use VFD USB01 or IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC Control terminals MI1 to MI6 Keypad mounting port z Gee pocsol cooces 3 2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww
169. NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 11 ZCP P S4 S2 S D Zone Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oR x y m k H Knx kny knm T c D ZCP ZCPP 9 steps S ll s g s S2 al e alela Operands S1 Lower bound of zone comparison S2 Upper bound of zone comparison S Comparison value D Comparison result Explanations i OV Bo IN The content in S1 should be smaller than the content in S2 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D When S1 gt S2 the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower upper bound The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction or b31 1 in 32 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 Designate device MO and operand D automatically occupies MO M1 and M2 2 When X0 On ZCP instruction will be executed and one of MO M1 and M2 will be On When X10 Off ZCP instruction will not be executed and MO M1 and M2 remain their status before XO Off Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 47 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 h
170. On A T Off X0 The figure above uses timer TO to control coil Y1 to be ON After Y1 is ON timer TO will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1 The oscillating circuit will be shown as above n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number T is the base of timer clock period Example 8 Blinking Circuit Xo T2 n2 T X0 T1 gt n1 T The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms It uses two timers to control On OFF time of Y1 coil If figure n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2 T is the base of timer clock period Example 9 Triggered Circuit XO tH fi MO Y1 lieit 1 1 1 1k CD wol M h hh MO Y1 A In figure above the rising edge differential command of X0 will make coil MO to have a single pulse of AT a scan time Y1 will be ON during this scan time In the next scan time coil MO will be OFF normally close MO and normally close Y1 are all closed However coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising edge comes after input X0 and coil MO is ON for a scan time The timing chart is as shown above This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input From above timing when input XO is a square wave of a period T output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T D 16 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 9
171. On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the right as shown in the figure below The bit marked with gt will be sent to carry flag M1022 X0 Rotate to the right gt upper bit lower bit Dio phibia 4 x bits p After one rotation to the right walt upper bit lower bit M1022 D10 o 1lol1lol1lilililolililolijolo gt _0_ Carry h flag API Mnemonic Operands Function 31 ROL P D n Rotate to the Left Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oP X Y M K H Knx Kny Knm T C D ROL ROLP 5 steps D lle x n D 56 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Operands D Device to be rotated n Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions ROLP Program Example When X0 goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the left as shown in the figure below The bit marked with 3X will be sent to carry flag M1022 Hs Rotate to the left upper bit lower bit M1022 EEE 4 Jofofolofofofoyo D10 Carry x ee a 16 bits i After one rotation x upper bit
172. Output 01 39 Voltage Vmax Motor 3 Mid Point 01 40 Frequency Fmid Motor 3 Mid Point Voltage OLA Vmid Motor 3 Minimum Output 01 42 Frequency Fmin Motor 3 Minimum Output 01 43 Voltage Vmin Motor 3 4 6 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Settings 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto Y customer Setting 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of First 1 0 to 10V from AVI 702 00 Master Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from 1 Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 0 Digital keypad 1 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET
173. Over Voltage Stall function Pr 06 00 supervision operating Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 4 73 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description ia Over Current Stall Active when the Over Current Stall function Pr 06 01 supervision Pr 06 02 operating i Heat Sink Overheat When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn off Warning the drive When it is higher than 85 C 185 F it will be ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level o Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal Refer to 16 PID supervision Pr 10 12 and Pr 13 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV Zero Speed Output 19 Active when the drive is standby or stop Signal Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAvE J Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt Pr 03 11 Deactivated when Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 12 after STOP command 22 Drive Ready Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected Desired Frequency 2 23 q y Attained Active when the desired frequency 1 Pr 03 14 is attained kr E Desired Frequency 2 Attained 0 00 to 600 0 Hz KAIA Desired Frequency
174. Over the PID Detection Value an Related parameters Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display and Pr 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback 10 12 PID Offset Level Unit Settings 1 0 to 50 0 Factory Setting 10 0 J This parameter is used to set max allowable value of PID error 10 13 Detection Time of PID Offset Unit second Settings 0 1 to 300 0 sec Factory Setting 5 0 AA This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback aa When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr 10 12 for a time exceeding the setting of Pr 10 13 PID feedback signal fault occurs and operates by the treatment set in Pr 10 09 an Related parameters Pr 10 00 PID Set Point Selection Pr 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Pr 10 09 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals and Pr 10 12 PID Offset Level 1017 Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By PID control 1 By Minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 aa This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID an The output of the AC motor drive will refer to this parameter setting When this parameter is set to 0 the output frequency will output by the calculation of PID When this parameter is set to 1 and Pr 01 08 is not set to 0 the output frequency Pr 01 08 setting Otherwise the output frequency Pr 01 05 setting an Related paramete
175. Parameters Display the Operation Command Source Settings Read Only Factory display 4 an You can read the operation source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 Bit0 1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad 2 Bit1 1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication 4 Bit2 1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal 8 Bit3 1 Operation Command Source by Multi input function Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command 16 Bit4 1 NOT for VFD E C models 32 Bits 1 Operation Command Source by CANopen Communication Interface When it displays 8 it means that the operation command source is from multi input function Thus when Pr 04 05 04 08 are set to 8 Jog Operation 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection Ccommunication and 21 FWD REV command it will display 8 in Pr 02 17 AR Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 02 18 Selection for Carrier Modulation Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By carrier modulation of load current and temperature 1 By carrier modulation of load current qo Setting 0 The PWM carrier frequency Fc will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive P
176. Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 and Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Voltage 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vbase 01 04 Mid point Voltage Vmid 01 06 L Minimum 94 05 01 03 01 01 01 00 utp Minimum Mid point Maximum Voltage Maximum otage Output Freq Frequency Output Vmin Freq Fmid Fbase Frequency Fmin Frequency V f Curve Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com 01 07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 1 to 120 0 Factory Setting 110 0 aa This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit Pr 01 08 The Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 is regarded as 100 an Output Frequency Upper Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 07 100 a The max output frequency of the AC motor drive will be limited by this setting If the setting of frequency command is greater than Pr 01 07 the output frequency will be equal to or less than Pr 01 07 an When enabling Pr 07 03 or Pr 10 00 10 13 the output frequency of the AC motor drive may exceed the frequency command but it is still limited by this setting aa Related parameters Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax and Pr 01 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit UME Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit
177. Pr os Peles a fes e e e ale lela 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage 0 1 600 Hz 1 15 3 phase 1 9 3 2 43 7 1 112 14 19 26 35 41 49 3 phase 380 480V 50 60Hz 10 342 528V 5 47 63Hz Natural Ea rec TAT Control System Frequency Setting Resolution Output Frequency Resolution Torque Characteristics Overload Endurance Skip Frequency Accel Decel Time Stall Prevention Level Control Characteristics Regenerated Brake Torque DC Brake V f Pattern Frequency Setting Keypad External Signal Operation Keypad Setting Signal External Signal Multi function Input Signal Operating Characteristics General Specifications SPWM Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation control V f or sensorless vector control 0 01Hz 0 01Hz Including the auto torque auto slip compensation starting torque can be 150 at 3 0Hz 150 of rated current for 1 minute Three zones setting range 0 1 600Hz 0 1 to 600 seconds 2 Independent settings for Accel Decel time Setting 20 to 250 of rated current Operation frequency 0 1 600 0Hz output 0 100 rated current Start time 0 60 seconds stop time 0 60 seconds Approx 20 up to 125 possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit 1 15hp 0 75 11kW models have brake chopper built in 4 point adjustable V f pattern Setting by 40 C Y Potentiometer 5kQ 0 5W 0 to 10VDC 4 to 20mA RS 485 interface Multi function Inputs 3 to
178. R calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com D 31 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0 X1 OR X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORI Parallel connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Explanations The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X0 LD x1 Load contact A of XO ORI X1 Connect to contact B of X1 X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANB Series connection Multiple Circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the ANB calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register D 32 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 8
179. R n K10 YO u yo og 14 T RST Tl 72 20 D 3791 D 2 5 Program Download Please do following s vr program download CODE Step 1 Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft Step 2 After finishing compiler choose the item Write to PLC in the communication items After finishing Step 2 the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the communication format D 2 6 Program Monitor If you execute start monitor in the communication item during executing PLC the ladder diagram will be shown as follows M1000 Tl K10 KS a is eas Cw yo y T2 K10 K5 RST T1 T2 D 2 7 The Limit of PLC 1 The protocol of PLC is 7 E 1 2 Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload download 3 The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ gt WPR 4 When setting P 00 04 to 2 the display will be the value in PLC register D1043 A 0 999 display Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function B 1000 9999 display It will only display the first 3 digits The LED at the bottom right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X10 1000 C 10
180. RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Digital keypad potentiometer ak U N CANopen communication a AR These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive The factory setting for master frequency command is 1 digital keypad is optional please refer to Appendix B for details Setting 2 use the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI2 When setting to AVI AVI2 is indicated Please note the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal ACI Pr 04 19 should be set to 0 and AVI for analog voltage signal AVI2 Pr 04 19 should be set to 1 When the 3 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the source of first master frequency command Pr 02 00 will force setting to 2 This setting Pr 02 00 can t be changed till the 3 switch is set to be OFF TE When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 for details PR 02 09 is only valid when one of Pr 04 05 04 08 is set to 22 When setting 22 is activated the source of the frequency command is the setting of Pr 02 09 The factory setting of the source of frequency command is the first frequency command Only one of the source of first master frequency command and second master frequency command can be enable at one time Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Mult
181. Read only Settings 0 PG card 1 PLC aa This parameter reads the high speed counter of the drive to use on PG card or PLC Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 181 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 4 Different Parameters for VFD E C Models The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http www delta com tw industrialautomation Software version for VFD E C is power board V1 00 and control board V2 00 A The parameter can be set during operation Group 0 User Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings BAPE Customer etting 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit 00 03 Start up Display Uxxx 0 Selection 3 Multifunction display see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLC0 PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 00 04 Content of Multi 0 Display the content of user defined unit 0
182. Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix E CANopen Function Initializing Pre Operational Operational Stopped PDO SDO SYNC Time Stamp EMERG Boot up O Ol JO CJO O 9 JO O OJO O NMT NMT Protocol is shown as follows NMT Master Start Remote Node NMT Slave s Request byte0 byte1 Indication s t CS_ Node ID gt Indication i COB ID 0 gt Indication gt Indication Cs Value Definition 1 Start 2 Stop 128 Enter Pre Operational 129 Reset Node 130 Reset Communication E 1 4 2 SDO Service Data Object SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client Server model One SDO has two COB ID request SDO and response SDO to upload or download data between two nodes No data limit for SDOs to transfer data But it needs to transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment The Object Dictionary OD is a group of objects in CANopen node Every node has an OD in the system and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior The access path of OD is the index and sub index each object has a unique index in OD and has sub index if necessary The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as
183. STALLATION FOR SAFETY Aun AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made 2 A charge may still remain in the DC link capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Never reassemble internal components or wiring The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input output terminals Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply 5 Ground the VFD E using the ground terminal The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram 6 VFD E series is used only to control variable speed of 3 phase induction motors NOT for 1 phase motors or other purpose 7 VFD E series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Auma DO NOT use Hi pot test for internal components The semi conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high voltage 2 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards These components are especially sensitive to static
184. SUBP 13 steps S all e als e D e elele Operands S1 Minuend S2 Subtrahend D Remainder Explanations 1 This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D 2 The highest bit is symbolic bit O and 1 which is suitable for algebraic subtraction 3 Flag changes in binary subtraction In 16 bit instruction A If the operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C Ifthe operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example In 16 bit BIN subtraction When X0 On the content in DO will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in D20 X0 LP se oo on om D 52 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 22 MUL P S4 S2 D Multiplication Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x y mM KH Knx kny Kn T c D MUL DMULP 7 steps S aa e e lee S2 els e Wele fe D x e le Te Operands S1 Multiplicand S2 Multiplicator D Product Explanations i In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices 2 This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negati
185. SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 35 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Example If you need to set up the communication speed of CME COP01 as 500K simply switch BR to 5 BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate 0 10K 4 250K 1 20K 5 500K 2 50K 6 800K 3 125K 7 1M MAC ID Setting elie es Rotary switches ID_L and ID_H set up the S E i a Node ID on CANopen network in hex Setup ow o o o range 00 7F 80 FF are forbidden HRAS erga ID_H ID_L Example If you need to set up the communication address of CME COP01 as 26 1AH simply switch ID_H to 1 and ID_L to A Switch Setting Content 0s 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting B 10 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting There are 3 LED indicators RUN ERROR and SP on CME COP01 to indicate the communication status of CME COP01 RUN LED LED Status State Indication OFF No power No power on CME COP01 card Single Flash E STOPPED CME COP01 is in STOPPED state Green Blinking CME COP01 is in the PRE Green ee ee OPERATIONAL state CME COP01 is in the Green ON OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL state Red ON Configuration error Node ID or Baud rate setting error B 36 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt c
186. Set Pr 04 05 to 04 08 or Pr 11 06 to 11 11 to 23 According to DSP 402 motion control rule CANopen provides speed control mode There are many status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop To get current status please read Status Word Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external terminals Control word is a 16 byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition The status bits are bit 4 to bit 6 as shown in the following Bit 4 ramp function enabled Bit 5 ramp function disabled Bit 6 rfg use reference Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 13 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix E CANopen Function Following is the flow chart for status switch http Awww automatedpt com Power Fault Disable Start Fault Reaction Active X0OXX1111 Not Ready to Switch On X0XX0000 Few X0XX1000 XXXXXXXX Switch On Disable c le 0XXXXX0X X1XX0000 lt OXXXXXOX OXXXX110 ee QStop 1 OXXXX01X QStop 0 OXXXX01X Ready to Switch On or OXXXXX0X X01X0001 QStop 0 oxn Joooxit0 Power Switch On Enable X01X0011 0XXXXX0X or oon ovorort0 TAO Font 0 QStop 0 GSLSN Operation Enable Quick Stop Active X01X0111 X00X0111 0XXX1111 QStop 1 E 14 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automat
187. Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 3 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 3 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 CJ The V f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 To set the voltage and frequency for each motor please refer to Pr 01 01 01 06 for motor 0 factory setting Pr 01 26 01 31 for motor 1 Pr 01 32 01 37 for motor 2 and Pr 01 38 01 43 for motor 3 qi Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 4 58 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters 02 00 X Source of First Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 1 02 09 X Source of Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Digital keypad is optional 0 to 10V from AVI 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2
188. TOP OFF the AC motor drive R W D 24 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function cists Function EN M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON R W M1027 Reserved M1028 Enable ON disable OFF high speed counter function R W M1029 Clear the value of high speed counter R W M1030 Decide to count up OFF count down ON R W M1031 Reserved D 4 9 Special Registers Special D Function Read R Write W D1000 Reserved D1001 PLC firmware version R D1002 Program capacity R D1003 Checksum R ae Reserved D1010 Present scan time Unit 0 1ms R D1011 Minimum scan time Unit 0 1ms D1012 Maximum scan time Unit 0 1ms aes Reserved D1020 Output frequency R D1021 Output current R The ID of the extension card 02 USB Card 03 12 Bit A D 2CH 12 Bit D A 2CH D1022 04 Relay Card 2C R 05 Relay Card 3A 06 3IN 30UT Card 07 PG Card en Reserved E Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 25 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Special D Function Read R Write W D1025 The present value of the high speed counter C235 low byte R D1026 The present value
189. Time i stops according ta freeruntostop operation decel eration time operation command RUN STOP command RUN STOP ramp to stop and free run to stop Frequency i Frequency frequency output stops according to 1 operation decel eration time operation free run to stop command command EF EF When Pr 02 02 is set to 2 or 3 When Pr 02 02 is set to 0 or 1 0203 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections Unit Hz 115V 230V 460V Series Power 0 25 to 15hp 0 2kW to 11kW Setting Range 1 to 15 kHz Factory Setting 8 kHz This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive 4 62 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Carrier Acoustic Electromagnetic Heat Current Frequency Noise Noise or leakage Dissipation Wave current 1kHz Significant Minimal Minimal KAA Minimal 8kHz 15kHz Minimal Significant Significant Significant aa From the table we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise AC motor drive heat dissipation and motor acoustic noise aa The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from
190. Torque Wire Terminals 1 5 kgf cm 4 4 in lbf 12 24 AWG 3 3 0 2mm A B C Terminals 2 2 kgf cm 1 7 in Ibf 16 24 AWG 1 3 0 2mm gt ea Frame A VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFDO07E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Frame B VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C Frame C VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C Frame D VFD150E23A 43A VFD150E23C 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 21 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 22 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com This page intentionally left blank Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up a Make sure that the wiring is correct In particular check that the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 are NOT connected to power CAUTION and that the drive is well grounded a Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive a Do
191. W030 BR500W100 BR1KW020 BR1KW075 Model no L1 L2 Max Weight g BRS500W030 335 320 30 5 3 60 1100 BR500W100 BR1KW020 400 385 50 5 3 100 2800 BR1KW075 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR1KOW050 Order P N BR1KOW050 BR1K2W008 BR1K2W6P8 BR1K5W005 BR1K5W040 B 6 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Order P N BR200W150 BR200W250 Ss u 4 oA NOMINAL Model no L142 L242 L3 2 W1 H1 BR200W150 165 150 110 30 60 BR200W250 B 1 2 Specifications for Brake Unit ae 230V Series 460V Series Model Name BUE XXXXX 20015 20037 40015 40037 Max Motor Power kW 45 Max Peak Discharge Current Brake Brake Start up Voltage DC Voltage DC 328 345 362 380 400 3V 656 690 725 760 800 6V DC Voltage 200 400VDC 400 800VDC Heat Sink Overheat Temperature over 100 C 212 F Power Charge Display Blackout until bus P N voltage is below 50VDC Indoor no corrosive gases metallic dust 10 C 50 C 14 F to 122 F 20 C 60 C 4 F to 140 F 90 Non condensing 9 8m s 1G under 20Hz 2m s 0 2G at 20
192. able for algebraic addition e g 3 9 6 4 Flag changes in binary addition 16 bit command A Ifthe operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C Ifthe operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example 1 16 bit command When X0 On the content in DO will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20 X0 Lit free oo oro om Remarks Flags and the positive negative sign of the values 16 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag y Nr N 2 1 0 32 768 lt 1 0 1 gt 32 767 0 1 2 The highestbit The highest bit Borrowflag of the data of the data Carry flag 1 negative 0 positive 32 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zeto flag D CNF Y N 2 1 0 2 147 483 648 lt 1 O 1 gt 2 147 483 647 0 1 2 The highest bit The highest bit Borrow flag of the data Brian as i Carry flag 1 negative 0 positive Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 51 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 21 SUB P S4 S2 D Subtraction Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps 2 x y m k H Knx kny knm T c D SUB SUBP 7 steps S el s DSUB D
193. ad and the motor will stop to OHz by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 setting It needs to clear RESET to clear the warning message aa Setting Pr 10 09 to 1 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display FbE on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message aa Setting Pr 10 09 to 2 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display FbE on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running The warning message can be cleared after the feedback signal is normal aa Related parameters Pr 10 00 PID Set Point Selection Pr 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Pr 10 12 PID Offset Level and Pr 10 13 Detection Time of PID Offset D DrE The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals 1010 E Over the PID Detection Value 0 0 to 10 0 Settings Factory Setting 1 0 aa This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 163 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters gq This parameter will affect Pr 00 04 setting 5 directly That is Pr 00 04 setting 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b PID detection value X Gain
194. ake resistor optional _ A Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker B2 j Motor R L1 U T1 IM S L2 V T2 3 i I ig T L3 E j W T3 pN Recommended Circuit Tt when power supply E l al is turned OFF by a SA fault output MC RB RA Multi If the fault occurs the RC Ai ion a oput contact will be ON to CoN T FEOT APE E OTO Srana turn off the power and OFF MC bi f RB Factory soning IS protect the power system Pe malfunction indication 24V FWD Stop Factory setting T REV St MI1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode op MI2 yr Driveis in operation tow Factory Multi step 1 MI3 NF rhe 48V50mA Max setting Multi step2 nay Multi function PNP i Phot l Output Please refer to Figure 7 4 Multi step 3 SS MIS MCM See a ror wiring ONNEN e Multi step 4 MI6 AFM Analog Multi function Digital Signal Common E j Output Terminal mode Ee eer DCM factory setting Analog LA freq current meter Lae ACM 0 10VDC 2mA EO Analog Signal common Factory setting output 10V frequency Powers I Factory setting 3 oe OA y Ne ska Jea RS 485 Master Frequency Serial interface swz 1 Oto 10V 47K 1 Reserved aci E ACI 2 EV ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V 3 GND When switching to AVI ACM gai A it indicates AVI2 Agaras Analog Signal Common 13 E 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Main circuit power terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable f TG For VFD E T series the braking resistor
195. ally The steps for AUTO Tuning are 1 Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct 2 Make sure the motor has no load before executing auto tuning and the shaft is not connected to any belt or gear motor 3 Fill in Pr 01 01 Pr 01 02 Pr 07 00 Pr 07 04 and Pr 07 06 with correct values 4 After Pr 07 04 is set to 2 the AC motor drive will execute auto tuning immediately after receiving a RUN command Note The motor will run The total auto tune time will be 15 seconds Pr 01 09 Pr 01 10 Higher power drives need longer Accel Decel time factory setting is recommended After executing Auto tune Pr 07 04 is set to 0 5 After executing please check if there are values filled in Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 If not please press RUN key after setting Pr 07 04 again 6 Then you can set Pr 00 10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application requirement 4 119 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Pr 07 01 Motor No Load Current Motor 0 Pr 07 05 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 Pria 1 In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel 2 It is not recommended to use vector co
196. alog voltage 0 0 10 0V CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 AVO2 AO2 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA AO2 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 42 25 AO2 Analog Output 4 to 200 wl Gain 0 No function AUI Analog Input 1 Source of the 1st frequency Selection 2 Source of the 2nd frequency X 12 27 ro Analog Input 9 00 200 00 jo jas 0 Positive bias 12 28 AUI Bias Polarity 1 e N bias x12 29 29 AUI AUI Analog Gain Gain 1200 AUI Negative Bias 0 No AUI Negative Bias Command Reverse Motion 1 Negative Bias REV Motion Enabled Enable Disable 2 Negative Bias REV Motion Disabled aa Aaaa ga Po Delay Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 31 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Disabled 1 Single phase 13 00 PG Input 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation 13 01 PG Pulse Range 1to20000 S to 20000 Wa o Number Proportional Gain 13 04 Integral Gain 0 00 to 100 00see 00 to 100 00 sec Speed Control Output Frequency 0 00 to 100 00Hz 10 00 Li
197. and ORF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 4 ANB command a block connects to a device or a block in series ANB command 5 ORB command J If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right 6 MPS MRD MPP commands Divergent memory of multi output It can produce many various outputs 7 The command MPS is the start of divergent point The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line Basically each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol T 8 MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line it needs to read the status of original contact to keep D 12 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function on analyzing other ladder diagram You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol 9 MPP command is used to read the start status of the top
198. ant speed Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit Pr 02 08 Accel Decel Rate of Change of 02 08 UP DOWN 0 01 10 00 Hz Operation with Constant Speed 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of Second 1 0 to 10V from AVI 02 09 Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication a 0 First Master Frequency Command Combination ofthe 1 First Master Frequency Command First and Second 02 10 Second Master Frequency Command Master Frequency Command 2 First Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 02 11 Keypad Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz 60 00 Command Communication 0 00 to 600 0Hz 02 12 Frequency 60 00 Command 4 8 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto Y customer Setting The Selections for Saving Keypad or 02 13 Communication Frequency Command Initial Frequency Selection for 02 14 keypad amp RS485 USB Initial Frequency 02 15 Setpoint for keypad amp RS485 USB Display the Master 02 16 Freq Command Source Display the 02 17 Operation Command Source Selection of Carrier 02 18 Modulation Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Facto TY customer
199. apacitor 0 1 F and above and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams AVI ACI ACM ferrite core wind each wires 3 times or more around the core Digital inputs MI1 MI6 DCM When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce Digital outputs MO1 MCM Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity see wiring diagrams When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect a surge absorber or fly back diode across the coil and check the polarity General a Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference If necessary let them cross only at 90 angle The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals ANE Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage The specification for the control terminals 2 20 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring RA RB RC The position of the control terminals Terminals 1 AFM MCM MoL Terminals 2 sscescecessee MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MIS MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V RS 485 port Frame Control Terminals
200. arameters When the frequency command is lost 02 06 PA For continuous by system malfunction the AC motor Air conditioners A operation drive can still run Suitable for intelligent air conditioners Output Signal during Running Applications Purpose Functions elated PP P Parameters Signal available to stop braking brake 03 00 03 01 oo Provide a signal for release when the AC motor drive is General application running status running This signal will disappear 9 when the AC motor drive is free running Output Signal in Zero Speed pas Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequency is lower 03 00 03 01 gs Provide a signal for than the min output frequency a General application A ae running status signal is given for external system or control wiring Output Signal at Desired Frequency oe i Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequency is at the 03 00 03 01 General application Provide a signal for running status desired frequency by frequency command a signal is given for external system or control wiring frequency attained 4 36 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Output Signal for Base Block http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters on i Related Applications Purp
201. ase Loss 3130h 7 bh 000FH External Base Block 9000h 7 cogg 0011H Software protection failure 6320h 7 cF iG 0013H Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed cf 2G 0014H Internal EEPROM can not be read 5530h 7 H E 0015H CC current clamp 5000h 7 HPF 0016H OV hardware error 5000h 2 HPEF 0017H GFF hardware error 5000h 2 4P64 0018H OC hardware error 5000h 1 cF30 0019H U phase error 2300h 1 cf 4 001AH V phase error 2300h 1 cf 42 001BH W phase error 2300h 1 cF373 001CH OVorLV 3210h 2 cf34 001DH Temperature sensor error 4310h 3 cf i 0O01FH Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 9 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix E CANopen Function Controller CANopen ee F STE rror Display Error Description Error Regi Code Code polelen bit 0 7 cfg 0020H Internal EEPROM can not be read 5530h 7 Geer 0021H Analog signal error FFOOh 7 Pee 0023H Motor overheat protection 7120h 3 POoE 0024H PG signal error 7300h 7 cP iG 0029H Communication time out error on the 7500h 4 control board or power board Definition of Index Sener Factory z Index Sub Definition Setting R W Size Unit NOTE 0x1000 O Abort connection option code 0x00010192 RO eee 0x1001 O
202. at power side during running can be improved by 1 Separate the power system use a transformer for AC motor drive 2 Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive 3 If phase lead capacitors are used never on the AC motor drive output use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics 3 3 serial reactor phase lead capacitor a Motor Temperature Rises When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan the cooling will be bad at low speeds causing the motor to overheat Besides high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range 1 Use a motor with independent ventilation forced external cooling or increase the motor rated power 2 Use a special inverter duty motor 3 Do NOT run at low speeds for long time 5 10 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 Fault Code Information The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages Once a fault is detected the corresponding protective functions will be activated The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display The fiv
203. at step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed When this is done a complete 8 bit byte will have been processed Step 6 Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8 bit byte of the command message Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value When transmitting the CRC value in the message the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped i e the lower order byte will be transmitted first The following is an example of CRC generation using C language The function takes two arguments Unsigned char data a pointer to the message buffer Unsigned char length the quantity of bytes in the message buffer The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer Unsigned int crc_chk unsigned char data unsigned char length int j unsigned int reg_crc OxFFFF while length reg_crc data for j 0 j lt 8 j if reg_crc amp Ox01 LSB b0 1 reg_crc reg_crc gt gt 1 OxA001 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters else reg_crc reg_crc gt gt 1 return reg_crc 3 5 Address list The contents of available addresses are shown as below Content Address Function GG means parameter group nn means parameter number AC drive fo
204. atedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 35 PG feedback signal error PGEr 36 39 Reserved 40 Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 41 dEb error 42 ACL Abnormal Communication Loop Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings aroy Customer etting 07 00 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 0 Motor No Load a 07 01 Current Motor 0 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 407 02 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 0 407 03 Slip Compensation 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Used without PG Motor 0 0 Disable 07 04 Motor Parameters 4 Auto tuning R1 0 Auto Tuning 2 Auto tuning R1 no load test Motor Line to line 07 05 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 0 Motor Rated Slip 07 06 Motor 0 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 o7 o7 Slip Compensation 0 to 250 200 imit Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 30 Constant Slip Compensation 7 07 09 Time Constant 0 05 10 00 sec 0 20 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 19 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Parameter Explanation Settings saat Customer etting Accumulative Motor 07
205. ates AVI2 Main circuit power terminals 5KQ 2 __ Analog Signal Common Ts BR brake resistor optional N aia Motor ai U T1 IM L2 V T2 O 3 W T3 C Sw E Za a E OT al RB y i RA Multi function contact output RC Refer to chapter2 4 for details i d RB Factory setting is Penang malfunction indication 24V RC MI1 MO1 Factory setting MI2 vere Drive is in operation Samay A 48V50mA Max MI3 MI4 Multi function MCM Photocoulper Output MIS MI6 _ Analog Multi function AFM Output Terminal DCM factory setting Analog freq current meter E ACM 0 10VDC 2mA E Analog Signal common Factory setting output 10V frequency Power supply 10V 20mA AVI RS 485 Master Frequency Serial interface Oto 10V 47K 1 Reserved ACI 2 EV 4 20mA 0 10V 3 GND 4 SG ACM 8 lt 1 5 sG E 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable gt E For VFD E T series the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals B1 and B2 directly But it can t connect DC BUS in parallel Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 2 7 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 6 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E23T VFD004E23T 43T VFD007E23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T BR r
206. ation JU is correct m Check if the motor runs steadily vo a without abnormal noise and vibration E Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth If the results of trial run are normal please start the formal run 3 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters The VFD E parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting In most applications the user can finish all parameter settings before start up without the need for re adjustment during operation The 14 groups are as follows Group 0 User Parameters Group 1 Basic Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Group 3 Output Function Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters Group 5 Multi Step Speed Parameters Group 6 Protection Parameters Group 7 Motor Parameters Group 8 Special Parameters Group 9 Communication Parameters Group 10 PID Control Parameters Group 11 Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 1 Summary of Parameter Settings Aw The parameter can be set during operation Grou
207. automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Operation Method Operation Command Frequen urce karey coure Source When setting communication by the PC it needs to use VFD USB01 or Operate from the IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC communication nae g Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details FWD Stop Factory setting REV Sto amp MI1 NPN Mode P o MI2 shi Factory 4Multi step 1 5 5 MI3 y settin i ia g Mult step 2 __ MI4 Multi step 3 5 5 MI5 Multi step 4 a MI6 Digital Signal Common DCM EO Don t apply the mains voltage directly to above terminals b 10V Operate from 3 Power supply external signal Roae setting 10V3mA wae 5KQ 2 OAVI Master Frequency J fsw2 1 0 to 10V 47K 9 ACI 1 ACI ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V When switching to AVI ACM it indicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common ad Figure 3 1 External terminals input MI1 DCM MI2 DCM STOP RESET MI3 DCM Set Pr 04 05 10 MI4 DCM Set Pr 04 06 11 Operate from the optional keypad oa a KPE LE02 3 3 Trial Run The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal Pr 02 01 2 1 Both MI1 DCM and MI2 DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD STOP and REV STOP 2 Please connect a potentiometer among AVI 10V and
208. ay D 4 5 The Function of Timer The unit of timer is 1ms 10ms and 100ms The count method is count up The output coil will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings The setting is K in decimal number Data register D can be also used as settings The real setting time of timer unit of timer settings Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 21 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 4 6 The Features and Functions of Counter http Awww automatedpt com Features Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up down Settings 0 32 767 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Designate for constant Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D 2 for designated Present value change Counter will stop when attaining settings Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings Output contact When count attains settings contact will be On and latched When count up attains settings contact will be On and latched When count down attains settings contact will reset to Off Reset action The present value will reset to will reset to Off 0 when RST command is executed and contact Present register 16 bits 32 bits Contact action After scanning act together After scanning act
209. block Time for Speed Search BB and Pr 08 08 Current Limit for Speed Search 08 05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit second Settings 0 1 to 20 0 sec Factory Setting 2 0 aa If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting the AC motor drive will act by Pr 08 04 setting If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time the AC motor drive output is then turned off coast stop jan The selected operation after power loss in Pr 08 04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is lt 20 seconds and the AC motor drive displays Lu But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload even if the maximum allowable power loss time is lt 20 seconds the operation mode as set in Pr 08 04 is not executed In that case it starts up normally 08 06 Base Block Speed Search Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable 1 Speed search starts with last frequency 2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 AR This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled one of Pr 04 05 04 08 is set to 9 aa The speed search actions between Pr 08 04 and Pr 08 06 are the same The priority of Pr 08 06 is higher than Pr 08 04 That is Pr 08 04 will be invalid after Pr 08 06 is set and the speed search will act by Pr 08 06 an Related parameters Pr 08 07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB Pr 04 05 Multi function Input
210. by 11B RUN LED is on STOP LED is off When AC motor drive runs Bit 2 1 JOG command Bit 3 4 00B FWD LED is on REV LED is off When AC motor drive runs forward 2101H 01B FWD LED is on REV LED blinks When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward 10B FWD LED blinks REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse 11B FWD LED is off REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs reverse Bit 5 7 Reserved 1 Master frequency Controlled by communication Bit8 interface Bit 9 1 Master frequency controlled by analog signal Bit 10 1 Operation command controlled by communication interface Bit 11 15 Reserved Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 151 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 152 Content Address Function 2102H Frequency command F 2103H Output frequency H 2104H Output current AXXX X 2105H Reserved 2106H Reserved 2107H Reserved 2108H DC BUS Voltage UXXX X 2109H Output voltage EXXX X 210AH Display temperature of IGBT C 2116H User defined Low word 2117H User defined High word Note 2116H is number display of Pr 00 04 High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr 00
211. ch Frequency during Start up Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Setting Frequency 1 Maximum Operation Frequency Pr 01 00 a This parameter determines the start value of the speed search frequency Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 137 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 9 Communication Parameters There is a built in RS 485 serial interface marked RJ 45 near to the control terminals The pins are defined below RS 485 NOT for VFD E C models 8 lt 1 Serial interface 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND 4 SG 5 SG 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved The pins definition for VFD E C models please refer to chapter E 1 2 Each VFD E AC motor drive has a pre assigned communication address specified by Pr 09 00 The RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address 09 00 A Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting 1 BA If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS 485 serial communication the communication address for this drive must be set via this parameter And the communication address for each AC motor drive must be different and unique 09 01 X Transmission Speed Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps bits second 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps Aa This parameter i
212. ck Multi function Input ra 11 09 Terminal M110 Up Increment master frequency Down Decrement master frequency 12 Counter Trigger Signal Multi function Input 13 Counter reset at Terminal MI11 14 E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled Multi function Input 16 Output shutoff stop Terminal MI12 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 187 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 13 10 Reserved 4 188 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters This page intentionally left blank Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 189 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 htt
213. clic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only 0 O O 1 240 O 241 251 Reserved 252 O O 253 O O 254 O 255 O Type number 1 240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions Type number 252 indicates the data is updated but not sent immediately after receiving SYNC Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR Type number 254 Delta CANopen doesn t support this transmission format Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 7 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix E CANopen Function Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary Example Master transmits PDO data to Slave PDO1 CAN H gt gt gt CAN L gt gt i Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 0x88 Index Sub efinition Value R W Size C 0x60400010 PDO1 Map 0x60400010 0x6040 O 0 Control word 0x2211 R W Byes Slave returns message to Master PDO1 CAN H lt t 4 CAN L I 4 T Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0
214. col 3 1 Communication Data Frame ASCII mode STX Start character 3AH Address Hi Communication address Address Lo 8 bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Command code Function Lo 8 bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA n 1 Contents of data to Nx8 bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes DATA 0 n lt 20 maximum of 40 ASCII codes 4 142 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum LRC CHK Lo 8 bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes END Hi End characters END Lo END1 CR ODH ENDO LF OAH RTU mode START A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address Communication address 8 bit address Function Command code 8 bit command DATA n 1 Contents of data to nx8 bit data n lt 40 20 x 16 bit data DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC check sum CRC CHK High 16 bit check sum consists of 2 8 bit characters END A silent interval of more than 10 ms 3 2 Address Communication Address Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254 Acommunication address equal to 0 means broadcast to all AC drives AMD In this case the AMD will not reply any message to the master device OOH broadcast to all AC drives 01H AC drive of address 01 OFH AC drive of address 15 10H A
215. d Status indicator Output Frequency__ Status indicator User Defined Units Status indicator JOG By pressing JOG key LED Display Indicates frequency voltage current user defined units read and save etc Model Number Status Display Display the driver s current status Jog frequency operation UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency Left Key MODE Change between different display mode PU Key P gt k P gt Switch the operation command source k Right key Move cursor to the left FWD REV Key Move the cursor to the right Select FWD REV operation EWD PROG REv DAT PROGIDATA Used to enter programming parameters STOP RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred RUN Key Start AC drive operation B 7 2 Explanation of Display Message Display Message Descriptions Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U V and W The custom unit u The output current present at terminals U V and W Press A to change the mode to READ Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad PUOQ6 It can read 4 groups
216. d that connects to output contact Y by sending On Off signal There are two kinds of output contact one is relay and the other is transistor It is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program Otherwise the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 19 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 20 x0 The output of YO will be decided by circuit z0 2 i e decided by On Off of X10 ap YO is repeated 10 7 v X D 4 3 Value Constant K H Constant K Decimal K 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation H Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation 1 There are five value types for DVP PLC to use by the different control destination The following is the explanation of value types Binary Number BIN It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage The relative information of binary system is in the following Bit Bit is the basic unit of binary system the status are 1 or 0 Nibble Itis made up of continuous 4 bits such as b3 b0 It can be used to represent number 0 9 of decimal or 0 F of hexadecimal Byte It is made up of continuous 2 nibble
217. dication 24V FWD Stop Factory setting REV St MI1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode Op MI2 y gt Drive is in operation NPN Factory Multi step 1 MI3 p gt 48V50mA Max Sw1 P d s t A setting e Multi step 2 MI4 Multi function PNP i Photocoulper Output Please refer to Figure7 4 Multi step 3 MI5 MCM p R TOF WIRING o NPN Multi step 4 MIG AFM Analog Multi function Output Digital Signal Common Terminal mode 9 9 p DCM factory setting Analog freq UAE ACM current meter 0 10VDC 2mA Er Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency ars RELA R RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models ACI Mode 5KQ J4 AVI 1 Reserved AVI Master Frequency 2 EV psw 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 AGND ACI acacia ACI eee ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V 6 Reseived When switching to AVI Lo ey ACM g 1 7 Reserved itindicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common 7_ E 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please refer to figure 8 Main circuit power terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Figure 3 for models of VFD E Series VFDO007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker R L1 S L2 is turned OFF bya fault output Ifthe fault occurs the contact will be ON to turn off the power and
218. ds the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register the pointer of operation result doesn t move Mnemonic Function MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register the stack pointer will decrease 1 Program Example Ladder diagram MPS XO x1 vro ra END X 00 D 34 Command code Operation LD X0 Load contact A of X0 MPS Save in stack AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MRD Read from the stack without moving pointer AND X2 Connect to contact A of X2 in series OUT MO Drive MO coil MPP Read from the stack OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil END End program Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www auto Appendix D How to Use PLC Function matedpt com Mnemonic Function INV Inverting Operation Operand None Explanations Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO E2 LD T INV X0 Load A contact of XO Inverting the operation result OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OUT Outpu
219. e Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 co This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive The Maximum Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Voltage Pr 01 04 If the output voltage of the AC motor drive is smaller than this setting the output voltage can t reach this setting due to input voltage limit If this setting is greater than the rated voltage of the motor it may cause over current of the motor output to damage motor or trigger the over current protection If this setting is smaller than the rated voltage of the motor it may cause the insufficient motor torque Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Mot
220. e n 7 Display output power P 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI I V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C 12 Display AVI3 ACI2 level I 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level i 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M User Defined 00 05 Coefficient K 0 1 to 160 0 1 0 00 06 Power Board Read only H H Software Version 00 07 Control Board Read only H H Software Version 00 08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0 00 09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0 0 V f Control 00 10 Control Method 0 1 Vector Control 00 11 Reserved 50Hz Base Voltage 0 230V 400V 00 12 0 Selection 1 220V 380V Group 1 Basic Parameters n Factory 01 00 Maximum Output 50 00 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Frequency Fmax Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Explanation Maximum Voltage 01 01 Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Maximum Output 01 02 Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Mid Point Voltage 01 04 mid Motor 0 Minimum Output 01 05 Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Minimum Output 01 06 Voltage Vmin Motor 0 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series
221. e we analyze the process step by step The number at the right corner is the explanation order Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The explanation of command order 1 LD X0 2 OR MO 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD TO AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR TO K10 The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram 1 LD LDI command give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising edge or falling edge when contact is ON as shown in the following Rising ed Dt ate Falling edge x0 x0 R Time m Time OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 2 AND ANI command single device connects to a device or a block in series AND command AND command Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 3 OR ORI command single device connects to a device or a block ce efras W OR command OR command OR command The structures of ORP
222. e 1 Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 and Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 107 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters high voltage at DC side gt over voltage 5 detection level J l ay output Tin frequency frequency Held e im a Deceleration characteristic when over voltage stall S prevention enabled Time previous deceleration time actual time to decelerate to stop when over voltage stall prevention is enabled oso Mamaia Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable ga A setting of 100 is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive an During acceleration the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr 06 01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor When this function is enabled the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value B D When it stalls due to the small motor power or operate with factory setting please decrease the setting of Pr 06 01 aa When the acceleration time is obstruction in the application it is not suitable to use this function The solution are 1 moderate increase
223. e a dangerous situation For safety the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time at low frequencies may cause overheating of the motor In that case forced external motor cooling is recommended Motor accel decel time is determined by motor rated torque load torque and load inertia If the stall prevention function is activated the accel decel time is automatically extended to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time with high load inertia that can t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive required time either use an external brake resistor and or brake unit depending on the model to shorten deceleration time only or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive C 3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor 5 When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3 phase induction motor take the following precautions The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time Under this condition the motor temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor s fan
224. e capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off RFI Jumper Location Frame A near the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 5 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B above the nameplate Frame C above the warning label Frame D near the input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Frame A A1 Power range Models 0 25 2hp 0 2 1 5kW VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T A A2 0 25 2hp 0 2 1 5kW VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P 1 5hp 0 75 3 7kW VFD007E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD007E11C VFD015E21C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C 7 5 15hp 5 5 11kW VFDO55E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C 20 30hp 15 22kW VFD150E23A 43A VFD150E23C 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction RFI Jumper RFI Jumper The A
225. e display shows 0 no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr 00 08 All parameters can then be changed including Pr 00 09 The first time you can set a password directly After successful setting of password the display will show 1 Be sure to record the password for later use To cancel the parameter lock set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr 00 08 The password consists of min 1 digits and max 4 digits 4 42 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr 00 08 Method 1 Re input original password into Pr 00 09 Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one Method 2 After rebooting password function will be recovered To lock parameters you can set Pr 00 02 to 1 or Pr 04 05 04 08 to 17 to prevent changing of parameters settings by unqualified personnel Please note that it is without password set 00 10 Control Method Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 V f Control 1 Vector Control This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive Control of V f Voltage frequency 1 To operate by the change of frequency and voltage without changing the mechanical characteristic of motor it can run by open loop method and also can use with PG card refer to Appendix
226. e most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication l Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal 6 1 1 Common Problems and Solutions Fault inti i i Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Check if motor power corresponds with the AC motor drive output power Check the wiring connections to U T1 V T2 W T3 for possible short circuits Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits also to ground Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor Increase the Acceleration Time Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a short circuit is removed and the other points above are checked it should be sent back to manufacturer Over current Abnormal increase in current m Da Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range Check for possible voltage transients DC bus over voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration Either increase the Decel Time or add an optional brake resistor and brake unit Check whether the required brake power is within the specified limits Over voltage B The DC bus voltage has ut exceeded its maximum allowable value Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 6 1 CALL NOW 800
227. e protection function It can use suitable brake resistor to decelerate the AC motor drive in short time and prevent internal over voltage Refer to Appendix B for brake resistor When enabling Pr 01 17 Acceleration S Curve and Pr 01 18 Deceleration S Curve the actual acceleration deceleration time will be longer than the setting 4 50 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters oO Related parameters Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting Pr 01 17 Acceleration S Curve Pr 01 18 Deceleration S Curve Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 01 00 Frequency Max output Frequency setting operation frequency 01 05 i Min output ime frequency Accel Time gt lt Decel Time gt 01 09 01 11 01 10 01 12 The definition of Accel Decel Time 01 19 Accel Decel Time Unit Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Unit 0 1 sec 1 Unit 0 01 sec AR The Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 3 4 are selected according to the Multi function Input Terminals Settings See Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for more details AR In the diagram shown below the Acceleration Deceleration T
228. eared this input can be used to reset the drive Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 89 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description When the command is active acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed Frequency setting frequency ore accel inhibit decel inhibit EIN actual operation 6 Accel Decel Inhibit o frequency acel inhibi decel inhibit actual operation frequency MIx GND ON ON ON ON operation ON OFF command Used to select the one of 2 Accel Decel Times Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 Frequency setting Accel Decel Time frequency 01 09 01 11 01 09 7 Selection 00 10 01 12 01 12 Command Time MIx GND ON ON operation oy ON ON OFF command Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 for Jog control NOTE Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped Refer to parameter Pr 01 13 Pr 01 15 A 01 15 A Jog Operation Jog frequency Control 01 05 Min output frequency Jog accel time Jog decel time 01 13 01 14 MIx GND ON OFF 4 90 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter
229. eceives A and B pulses from encoder output and sends this feedback signal to the AC motor drive for speed or position control Setting 0 disable PG function Setting 1 for speed position control but can t distinguish motor rotation direction Setting 2 both for speed control and distinguish motor rotation direction A phase leads B phase as shown in the following diagram and motor is forward running Setting 3 both for speed control and distinguish motor rotation direction B phase leads A phase as shown in the following diagram and motor is reverse running Related parameter Pr 13 01 PG Pulse Range Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 177 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters A phase leads B phase A phase J UW CCW B phase JHL 3 00 2 When receiving a forward command motor will rotate in counterclockwise direction see from output side B phase leads A phase A phase TUL 13 00 3 B phase When receiving a reverse command motor willrotate in clockwise direction see from output side A phase eae GE ow TEL GENERATOR 1 B phase When encoder rotates in clockwise direction see from input side Atthis moment A phase leads B phase 1301 PG Pulse Range Settings 1 to 20000 Factory Setting 600 An A Pulse Generator PG is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the m
230. edpt com
231. eed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 14 15th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency Group 6 Protection Parameters Factory 115 230V series 330 0V to 410 0V 390 0V Over Voltage Stall oe Prevention 460V series 660 0V to 820 0V 780 0V 0 0 Disable over voltage stall prevention 4 16 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Over Current Stall 0 Disable 06 01 Prevention during R 170 Accel 20 to 250 Over Current Stall 0 Disable 06 02 Prevention during 170 Operation 20 to 250 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during constant speed operation After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Enabled during constant speed operation Over Torque 06 03 Detection Mode After the over torque is detected stop OL2 running 3 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected stop running Over Torque 06 05 Over Torque 0 1 to 60 0 sec 0 1 Detection Time Electronic Thermal 0 Standard motor self cooled by fan Overload Relay 06 06 Selection 1 Special motor forced external cooling 2 2 Disabled 06 07 Electronic Thermal 30 to 600 sec Characteristic 0 No fault Over current oc 06 08 sale Fault Over voltage
232. eees D 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com D Z Starup en ae nets oN AEE data a a R EE E aA E senate D 2 D 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution eseeieeriesreiesrrirerrresrereses D 2 D 2 2 Device Reference Table ce eeeeecceeeesneeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeenaeeeeneeeees D 3 D 2 3 WPLSoft Installation s ni ieas D 4 D 2 4 Program INDUt ccccceceeeeeecceceeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeesenaeaeeeeeeeeeeennaees D 4 D 2 5 Program Download c ccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeees D 5 D 2 6 Program Monitor ccccccceccecececeeeceeeeeceeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeesesseaeeeeees D 5 DZT The LimitiOf Ph Cy 2 kcscevtcc en lei raaa aae eR eLa aes D 5 D3 Ladder Diagram icvvssiccesssetentinscotestistieadsicnies eaaeo D 7 D 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram 0004 D 7 D322 INt hOGUCTION assisi a e d D 7 D 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram eececccenccnee D 10 D 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program eccere D 13 D4 PEG DOVICES igotea a a a as ee Hedi eeeee hee D 18 D 4 1 Summary of DVP PLC Device Number scce D 18 D 4 2 Devices FUNCHIONS inni ein i ea D 19 D 4 3 Value Constant K H eenen D 20 D 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay 2 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeseeeeenneeeeeeeees D 21 D 4 5 The Function of Timer ee eecceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneaees D 21 D 4 6 The Features and Functions of Counter i e D 22 D 4 7 Register Ty
233. electricity To prevent damage to these components do not touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands 3 Only qualified persons are allowed to install wire and maintain AC motor drives ANa 1 Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power 2 DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature direct sunlight high humidity excessive vibration corrosive gases or liquids or airborne dust or metallic particles 3 Only use AC motor drives within specification Failure to comply may result in fire explosion or electric shock 4 To prevent personal injury please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment 5 When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor Refer to appendix B Reactor for details 6 The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be lt 240V lt 480V for 460V models and the short circuit must be lt 5000A RMS lt 10000A RMS for the gt 40hp 30kW models DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc Lonwork is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus International CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation CiA Other tradema
234. emperature lt 80C a dust collector AC motor drive ttt fan Gua 1 1 10 Operating storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor drive Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws Other directions are not allowed The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation The heat sink temperature may rise to 90 C when running The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 6 When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space e g cabinet the surrounding temperature must be within 10 40 C with good ventilation DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation Ta Prevent fiber particles scraps of paper saw dust metal particles etc from adhering to the heatsink 8 When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in between When installing one AC motor drive below another one use a metal separation between the AC
235. ency Pr 01 00 X Pr 10 07 This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr 01 07 Related parameter Pr 01 00 Maximum Output Frequency Fmax 10 08 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit second Settings 0 0 to d 3600 sec Factory Setting 60 0 gq This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning see Pr 10 09 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time aa If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal 4 162 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters a If it doesn t receive PID feedback signal over Pr 10 08 setting the feedback signal fault will occur and please refer to Pr 10 09 for the fault treatment oO Related parameter Pr 10 09 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals for PID feedback error Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warning and RAMP to stop 1 Warning and COAST to stop 2 Warning and keep operating aa AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback are abnormal according to Pr 10 16 oO Setting Pr 10 09 to 0 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display FbE on the digital keyp
236. ency at stop When setting Pr 02 14 to 0 the initial frequency will be current frequency When setting Pr 02 14 to 1 the initial frequency will be 0 When setting Pr 02 14 to 2 the initial frequency will be Pr 02 15 Ee Display the Master Freq Command Source Settings Read Only Factory display 1 aa You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 BitO 1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 2 Biti 1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 4 Bit2 1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi input function Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command 8 Bit3 1 NOT for VFD E C models a When it displays 4 it means that the master frequency command source is from multi input function Thus when Pr 04 05 04 08 are set to 1 Multi Step speed command 1 2 Multi Step speed command 2 3 Multi Step speed command 3 4 Multi Step speed command 4 8 Jog Operation 10 Up Increment master frequency and 11 Down Decrement master frequency it displays 4 in Pr 02 16 An Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 69 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4
237. ent Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved Related parameters Pr 08 01 DC Brake Time during Start up and Pr 08 02 DC Brake Time during Stopping EALES DC Brake Time during Start up Unit second Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 The motor may keep running due to external factor or itself inertia The over current may damage the motor or activate the drive s protection when running the drive suddenly This parameter can output a DC current with a torque to force the motor to stop for a stable start This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command When the time has elapsed the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency Pr 01 05 The DC brake is invalid when Pr 08 01 is set to 0 08 02 DC Brake Time during Stopping Unit second Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 AR o The motor may keep running due to external factor or itself inertia and can t stop by requirement This parameter can output a DC current with a torque to force the motor to stop after the drive stops outputting to ensure the motor is stop This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping If stopping with DC Brake is desired Pr 02 02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop The DC brake is invalid when Pr 08 02 is set to 0 0 Related parameters Pr 02 02 Stop Method and Pr 08 03 Start Point fo
238. equency Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Counter reset E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 16 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 NOT for VFD E C models Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Facts TY Customer Setting 23 Quick Stop Only for VFD E C models 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 0 Disabled Source of the 1st frequency Al1 Function Source of the 2nd frequency Selection PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback Al1 Analog Signal ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode AVI3 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V 12 02 Min Avis Input 0 0 to 10 0V Voltage 142 03 Min AVIS Scale 0 0 to 100 0 w Percentage Max AVI3 Input 12 05 Max AVIS Scale 9
239. er Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 1 5HP 0 75 3 7kW Frame B Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Keypad cover Case body Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 7 5 15HP 5 5 11kW Frame C Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Case body Keypad cover Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 20 30HP 15 22kW Frame D Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Case body Keypad cover Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 1 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Internal Structure READY power indicator RUN status indicator e FAULT fault indicator 1 Switch to ON for 50Hz refer to P 01 00 to P01 02 for details 2 Switch to ON for free run to stop refer to P02 02 3 Switch to ON for setting frequency source to ACI P 02 00 2 Keypad mounting port ACI terminal ACI AVI2 switch NPN PNP Mounting port for extension card RS485 port RJ 45 Dra The LED READY will light up after applying power The light won t be off until th
240. er to use a Equipment indication CO C1 C7 The symbol of equipment is C and the number uses decimal Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order timer value and counter value The data register is used to store data or parameters It stores D 8 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function 16 bit binary number i e a word in each register It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words Equipment indication DO D1 D29 The symbol of equipment is D and the number uses decimal The structure and explanation of ladder diagram Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment H Normally open contact a LD X Y M T C ie Normally closed contact b LDI X Y M T C H KS Serial normally open AND X Y M T C F J Parallel normally open OR X Y M T C i Parallel normally closed ORI X YM T C Ht Rising edge trigger switch LDP X Y M T Hy Falling edge trigger switch LDF X Y M T mH Rising edge trigger in serial ANDP X Y M T C aa AA a Falling edge trigger in serial ANDF X Y M T C Rising edge trigger in parallel ORP X Y M T C F Falling edge trigger in parallel ORF X Y M T C F dl Block in serial ANB none
241. es e friv iv viy A Count up all edges Count down all edges Pulse signal mode D1044 1 user can count by pulse input or signal A is for pulse and B is for signal Make sure that A B and GND are grounding Pulse flag mode D1044 2 user can count by M1030 Only A is needed for this mode and make sure that A and GND are grounding Program Example a D 58 Assume that when M100 ON it is set to A B phase mode When M101 ON it is set to pulse signal mode When M102 ON it is set to pulse flag mode M1030 is used to set to count up OFF and count down ON If MO goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 2 to H 3 or from H 4 to H 3 M3 will be always be ON If M1 goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 1004F to H 10050 or from H 10051 to H 10050 M2 will be always be ON M1028 it is used to enable ON disable OFF the high speed counter function M1029 it is used to clear the high speed counter M1018 it is used to start high speed counter function when M1028 is ON D1025 the low word of high speed counter C235 D1026 the high word of high speed counter C235 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function M100
242. et Time at Restart after Fault Unit second Settings 0 1 to 6000 sec Factory Setting 60 0 aa This parameter is used to set the auto reset time at restart after fault After restarting for fault if there is no fault for over Pr 08 16 setting from the restart for the previous fault the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to Pr 08 15 setting aa This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr 08 15 For example If Pr 08 15 is set to 10 and Pr 08 16 is set to 600s 10 min and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10 og Related parameter Pr 08 15 Auto Restart After Fault 08 17 Automatic Energy saving Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Energy saving operation disabled 1 Energy saving operation enabled oO When Pr 08 17 is set to 1 the acceleration and deceleration will operate with full voltage During constant speed operation it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the load This function is not suitable for the ever changing load or near full load during operation aa The max energy saving is in the stable load output At this moment the output voltage is almost 70 of the rated voltage Output Voltage 100 70 During auto energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load The output voltage is
243. etic Induction Noise Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive Of course there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive But this has its limits Therefore solving it from the outside as follows will be the best 1 2 Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independently i e not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other power equipment Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit In short solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of no product disconnect disturbing equipment no spread limit emission for disturbing equipment and no receive enhance immunity 5 14 Environmental Condition Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device you should comply with the environmental conditions Here are some remedial measures if necessary 1 To prevent vibration the use of anti vibration dampers is the last cho
244. etto 10 UP command an Related parameters Pr 02 08 Accel Decel Rate of Change of UP DOWN Operation with ON ON OFF Constant Speed Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Accel Decel Rate of Change of UP DOWN Operation with Unit Hz 2ms 02 08 Constant Speed Settings 0 01 10 00 Hz 2ms Factory Setting 0 01 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 67 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters qo This parameter determinates the constant speed When Pr 02 08 is set to 2 or 3 ozn X Keypad Frequency Command Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command gq Related parameters Pr 02 12 Communication Frequency Command 0242 A Communication Frequency Command Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 an This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency command qg It can use this parameter for remote control via communication ga Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Save Keypad amp Communication Frequency 1 Save Key
245. f first second frequency command is set to AVI 02 00 1 02 09 1 it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection i e Pr 07 12 cannot be set to 1 Only one of the source of first master frequency command and second master frequency command can be enable at one time Orr s If temperature exceeds the setting level motor will be coast to stop and e e is displayed When the temperature decreases below the level of Pr 07 15 Pr 07 16 and ha C L i stops blinking you can press RESET key to clear the fault Pr 07 14 overheat protection level must exceed Pr 07 15 overheat warning level The PTC uses the AVI input and is connected via resistor divider as shown below The voltage between 10V to ACM lies within 10 4V 11 2V The impedance for AVI is around 47kQ Recommended value for resistor divider R1 is 1 10kQ Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC 4 122 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters VFD E 10V resistor divider R1 AVI 47kQ PTC ACM internal circuit aa Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level Protection level Pr 07 14 Visto Rprc1 47K R1 Retci 47K Warning level Pr 07 16 Visto Retc2 47K R1 Rptc2 47K Definition V 10 voltage between
246. feedback will be decreased by the increasing output frequency please use this setting Select input terminal accordingly Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr 10 00 Master Frequency Related parameters Pr 00 04 Content of Multi function Display set to 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b Pr 10 11 Source of PID Set point and Pr 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection EZE X Source of PID Set point Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 Am This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr 10 00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz X Proportional Gain P Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 gq It is used to eliminate the system error It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster response speed But if setting too large value in Pr 10 02 it may cause the system oscillation and instability aa It can be used to set the proportional gain to decide the responds speed The larger value is set in Pr 10 02 the faster response it will get The smaller value is set in Pr 10 02 the slower response it will get If the other two gains I and D are set to zero proportional control is the only one effective Related parameters Pr 10 03 Integral Time 1 and Pr 10 04 Differential Control D 10 03 A Integral Time 1 Unit second Settings 0 00 to 100 0 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable co 4 160 The integral cont
247. following formula Pr 03 04 meter full scale voltage 10 x 100 For Example When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts adjust Pr 03 04 to 50 If Pr 03 03 is set to 0 then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency 03 05 Terminal Count Value Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 BA This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter To increase the internal counter one of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 should be set to 12 It can be used in the counter control application Upon completion of counting the specified output terminal will be activated Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 10 the count value will be reset after reaching the setting of Pr 03 05 Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 04 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 ta When the display shows c555 the drive has counted 555 times If display shows c555e it means that real counter value is between 5 550 and 5 559 03 06 Preliminary Count Value Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 an When the counter value counts from c1 to this value the corresponding multi function output terminal will be activated 4 76 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 htt
248. follows Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Data 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Index Index Index Data Data Data Data command L H Sub LL LH HL HH Initiate Domain Client O 0 1 N E S Download Server 0 1 1 Initiate Domain Client O 1 0 Upload Server 0 1 0 N JES Abort Domain Client 1 00 Transfer Server 1 0 0 N Bytes not use E normal 0 expedited 1 S size indicated E 1 4 3 PDO Process Data Object PDO communication can be described by the producer consumer model Each node of the network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be processed or not after receiving the message PDO can be transmitted from one device to one another device or to many other devices Every PDO has two PDO services a TxPDO and a RxPDO PDOs are transmitted in a non confirmed mode PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index 1400h for the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO and all transmission types are listed in the following table Type Number eee Cy
249. g the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point Frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage Pr 01 06 Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 AR This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive If the frequency command is greater than this setting the AC motor drive will accelerate to the frequency command by the accel decel time If the frequency command is less than this setting the AC motor drive will be ready without output voltage Please note that unsuitable setting may cause over current to damage motor or trigger the over current protection When Pr 08 04 is set to 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value it won t operate by V f curve Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 03 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 47 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 8
250. g and Energy saving when the AC motor 08 17 fans pumps and less vibrations drive runs at constant speed yet full precision machinery power acceleration and deceleration For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations Multi step Operation Applications Purpose Functions be Conveying machinery CYClic operation by To control 15 step speeds and duration 04 05 04 10 ying y multi step speeds by simple contact signals 05 00 05 14 Switching acceleration and deceleration times Applications Purpose Functions Retin Switching When an AC motor drive drives two or a Auto turntable for acceleration and more motors it can reach high speed 04 05 04 08 conveying machinery deceleration times gn Sp b but still start and stop smoothly by external signal Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 33 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Overheat Warning CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com deceleration pause Acceleration deceleration Applications Purpose Functions Paine When AC motor drive overheats it 03 00 03 01 Air conditioner Safety measure uses a thermal sensor to have 04 05 04 08 overheat warning Two wire three wire Applications Purpose Functions Ese a i 7 02 00 Pwoistop a Moree oi REVISTOP oo ee CLOSE REV 02 09 DEM 04 04 E OR RUN STOP meg eee
251. g of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will restart ani When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode frequency command is still calculated by PID When frequency reaches wake up frequency AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr 01 05 minimum frequency following the V f curve Frequency A 10 16 frequency calculated by PID Wake up 3 ff Frequency a P output 10 15 The limitof frequency i N decel time XK Sleep S S N Z SN Frequeney l N The limit of 01 05 accel time Min Output gt Time Frequency lt gt 10 14 Sleep wake up detection time Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 165 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Fmin lower bound of frequency Fsleep O O Fmin lt Fsleep lt Chapter 4 Parameters 1 lower bound of frequency CQ When Pr 01 05min output frequency lt PID frequency H lt Pr 01 08 lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled output frequency H lt Pr 10 15 sleep frequency and time gt Pr 10 14 detection time frequency will be O in sleep mode If sleep function is disabled output frequency H Pr 01 08 lower bound frequency ea The common adjustments of PID control are shown as follows Example 1 how to have stable control as soon as possible Please shorten Pr 10 03 Integral Time I setting and increase Pr 10 04 Differential Control D
252. ge Setting 1 when AVR function is disabled the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC bus voltage The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage It may cause insufficient over current Setting 2 the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration such as operated from high speed to low speed Setting 3 the drive will disable the AVR function at stop to accelerate the brake When the motor ramps to stop the deceleration time is longer When setting this parameter to 2 with auto acceleration deceleration the deceleration will be quicker Related parameter Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting Software Brake Level Unit V the Action Level of the Brake resistor Settings 115 230V series 370 0 to 430 0V Factory Setting 380 0 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V Factory Setting 760 0 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters og This parameter sets the DC bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated Users can choose the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration Refer to appendix B for the information of the brake resistor aa This parameter will be invalid for Frame A models VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFDO004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A and VFD022E23A 43A without brake chopper for which BUE brake unit must be used 08 20
253. h the suitable differential time it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment time However the differential operation will increase the noise interference Please note that too large differential will cause big noise interference Besides the differential shows the change and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change Therefore the differential control can t be used independently It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD controller or PID controller An This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease the oscillation and have a stable system But too long differential time may cause system oscillation an The differential controller acts for the change of error and can t reduce the interference It is not recommended to use this function in the serious interference 10 05 Upper Bound for Integral Control Unit 0 to 100 Factory Setting 100 Settings AR This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain 1 and therefore limits the Master Frequency The formula is Integral upper bound Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 x Pr 10 05 aa Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change In this way it may cause motor stall or machine damage go Related parameter Pr 01 00 Maximum Ou
254. haracteristics Duty cycle modification Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 C 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive C 1 Capacity Formulas 1 When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1 5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity 2 kxN u 2 375 x x lt 1 5xthe _ capacity _of _ AC _ motor _drive kVA ty 973 x x cos o 2 When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor 2 1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive a Acceleration time lt 60 seconds The starting capacity KAN r n ks 1 Pci 1X coso a Acceleration time 260 seconds 1 2 amp 1 Nr lt 1 5xthe_ capacity _of _ AC _ motor _drive kVA The starting capacity ARN T ns ks I Pci 1X coso 1 lk 1 lt the _ capacity _of _ AC _motor _drive kVA Nr 2 2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive A a Acceleration time lt 60 seconds nr Iu 1 M ks 1 lt 1 5xthe rated _current_of _AC_motor_drive A Acceleration time 260 seconds ny In 1 ks 1 lt the rated _current_of _AC_motor_drive A C 2 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 80
255. he inertia of the motor and load is too high Yes Use special motor No No Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Thicken or shorten the Yi wiring between the es motor or AC motor drive Check for low voltage atinput No Vv Reduce load or Yes increase the capacity deel a load torque of AC motor drive stood No Maybe AC motor drive has Check if the torque Yes malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA compensation is suitable No v Increase torque compensation 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected Motor does not run Check Pr 01 01 thru Pr 01 0 as expected and torque compensation NO y Adjust Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 settings and lower torque compensation Yes Vv A z Yes Run in low speed continuously gt Please use specific motor No 7 Y Is load too large gt Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive No Y Check if output voltage of U V W Y8S_ Motor has malfunction is balanced No Y Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 13 Electromagn
256. he motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault Pr 08 15 When using a PG card with PG encoder speed search will begin at the actual PG encoder feedback speed Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 130 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Mim Current Limit for Speed Search Unit Settings 30 to 200 Factory Setting 150 aa It limits the drive output current during speed search an When executing speed search the V f curve will be by the setting in the group 01 an The level of speed search will affect the speed synchronization time The larger setting is set and the faster it will reach the speed synchronization But too large setting may cause overload an When Pr 08 04 is set to 1 When the speed searches downward the output frequency starts with the master frequency The output voltage and output current will be increased from 0 When the output current reaches Pr 08 08 setting the output frequency continuous searches downward When the output frequency output voltage and V f setting frequency are the same it will be regarded as the synchronization reached and accelerate to the master frequency by V f curve aa When Pr 08 04 is set to
257. he operation command is OFF aa Related parameters Pr 01 15 Jog Frequency Pr 01 07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Pr 01 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Frequency JOG Freq Run Stop PU external terminals communication MiS fo MIG 1 ore j ON FON jon fon oN on OFF m O ON i on B ON 2nd speed MI3 to MI6 2 3rd speed MI3 to MI6 3 _4 4th speed MI3 to MI6 4 Jog Freq Multi function terminals MI3 MI6 Multi speed via External Terminals Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 105 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 106 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com MI6 4 MI5 3 MI4 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2 speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3 speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http A
258. hown in Appendix A When using a general GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter select a current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than 0 1 second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above Do NOT run stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON OFF Run stop AC motor drives by RUN STOP command via control terminals or keypad If you still need to run stop AC drives by turning power ON OFF it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour Do NOT connect 3 phase models to a 1 phase power source Output terminals for main circuit U V W 2 14 The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running The methods to control the operation direction are method 1 set by the communication parameters Please refer Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring to the group 9 for details Method2 control by the optional keypad KPE LE02 Refer to Appendix B for details a When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 on the AC motor drive Please use inductance filter Do not use phase compensation capacitors or L C Inductance Capacitance or R C Resistance Capacitance unless approved by Delta E DO NOT connect phase compen
259. hts 2 2 2 2 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 12N C Bt polele elei To u a Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Unit 2ms Settings 1 to 20 Factory Setting 1 aa This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals MI1 MI6 AR This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction AR The AC motor drive will check the status of multi function input terminals every 2ms It will only confirm the command and change the status when the input terminals status is changed Thus the delay time from command input to execution is 2msec Pr 04 10 1 X 2ms Suppose that Pr 04 10 is set to 4 the delay time will be 12ms 04 24 The Digital Input Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 97 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Display BitO 1 MI1 used by PLC Bit1 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC Bit4 1 MI5 used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used by PLC gq For standard AC motor drive without extension ca
260. i function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 and Pr 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 59 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 02 01 X Source of First Operation Command Factory Setting 1 Digital keypad Digital keypad is optional External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled Settings W N gt O The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1 digital keypad is optional B D When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 Pr 04 04 B B for details X Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 First Master Frequency Command Only 1 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency 2 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency gq It can be used to add or subtract the first frequency set in Pr 02 00 and the second frequency set in Pr 02 09 to meet the customers application For example if the master frequency is the first frequency speed source control
261. ice Vibrations must be within the specification Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short circuits If necessary install the AC motor drive in a dust proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations use a completely sealed enclosure The ambient temperature should be within the specification Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability For semiconductor components damage will occur once any specification is out of range Therefore it is necessary to periodically check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary In addition the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures making cabinet heating necessary Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 5 9 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 4 Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Use an air conditioner and or exsiccator 5 15 Affecting Other Machines An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons Some solutions are a High Harmonics at Power Side High harmonics
262. ice compatible with Windows Printer Printer with Windows driver RS 232 port At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC Applicable All Delta DVP PLC series and VFD E series Models Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 2 Start up D 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC function by the following five steps 1 Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download upload A Go to PLCO page by pressing the MODE key B Change to PLC2 by pressing the UP key and then press the ENTER key after confirmation C If succeeded END is displayed and back to PLC2 after one or two seconds Pio Po Ee Disable RunPLC Read write PLC program into AC drives gt ee You don t need to care about the PLC warning such as PLod PLSv and PIdA before downloading a program to VFD E 2 Connection Please connect RJ 45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485 to RS232 converter 3 Run the program The PLC status will always be PLC2 even if the AC motor drive is switched off There are three ways to operate PLC A In PLC1 page execute PLC program B In PLC2 page execute stop PLC program by using WPL software C After setting multi function input terminals MI3 to MI9 to 23 RUN STOP PLC it will display PLC1 fo
263. ime of the AC motor drive is the time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Suppose the Maximum Output Frequency is 60 Hz Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is 1 0 Hz and Acceleration Deceleration Time is 10 seconds The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1 0Hz is in this case 9 83 seconds 60 1 10 60 9 83secs Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 51 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency 01 00 Max output Frequency setting operation es frequency 01 05 Min output frequency Decel Time Time DED DEY The definition of Accel Decel Time 0 Hz i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ji 1 i T 1 T 1 1 1 Resulting Decel Time Resulting Accel Time Resulting Accel Decel Time 01 13 AW Jog Acceleration Time Unit second 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 01 14 X Jog Deceleration Time Unit second Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 X Jog Frequency Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz Factory Setting 6 00 qg Only external terminal JOG MI3 to MI
264. inear Accel controlled by current auto Decel Linear acceleration deceleration the acceleration deceleration that acts according to the acceleration deceleration time set by Pr 01 09 01 12 With Auto acceleration deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting stopping the load When Pr 01 16 is set to 3 Auto acceleration deceleration set by load During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current During Auto deceleration regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time When this parameter is set to 4 Auto acceleration deceleration set by Accel Decel Time setting the actual accel decel time will be equal to or more than parameter Pr 01 09 Pr 01 12 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 53 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters gq When this parameter is set to 5 Linear Accel controlled by current linear Decel 6 Linear Accel controlled by current auto Decel the current value when the drive performs over current stall prevention can be kept within the setting of stall prevention level For example if the setting of stall prevention level is 100 it will perform deceleration as the current exceeds 100 during opera
265. input power correct Or power cut Yes including momentary power loss No Check if there is any malfunction Yes component or disconnection in power supply circuit No Check if voltage is No _ gt within specification i Check if there is heavy load yes gt _ Restart afterreset Change defective component and check connection Make necessary corrections such as change power supply system for requirement with high start currentin the same power system i Check if Lv occurs when breaker and magnetic contactor is ON na Check if voltage between B1 and is greater than 200VDC for 115V 230V models 400VDC for 460V models ve s Control circuit has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact DELTA Yes No Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 No Suitable power transformer capacity Yes http Awww automatedpt com Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 5 Over Heat OH AC motor drive overheats Heat sink overheats Yy Check if temperature of heat sink No Temperature detection malfunctions is greater
266. ion NPN PNP selection parameters for motor 0 to motor 3 DEB and OOB Out Of Balance Detection for washing machine Alarm Output Contact Over voltage over current under voltage external fault overload ground Protection Functions fault overheating electronic thermal IGBT short circuit PTC 6 key 7 segment LED with 4 digit 5 status LEDs master frequency output Display Keypad optional frequency output current custom units parameter values for setup and lock faults RUN STOP RESET FWD REV PLC VFDO002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD007E11A 11C VFD015E21A 21C Built in Brake Chopper VFD022E21A 21C 23A 23C 43A 43C VFD037E23A 23C 43A 43C VFDO55E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD075E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD110E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD150E23A 23C 43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C Built in EMI Filter For 230V 1 phase and 460V 3 phase models Enclosure Rating IP20 Pollution Degree 2 Installation Location Altitude 1 000 m or lower keep from corrosive gasses liquid and dust 9 o o A A gt z Ambient Temperature 10 C to 50 C 40 C for side by side mounting Non Condensing and not frozen Storage Transportation 20 C to 60 C Temperature Ambient Humidity Below 90 RH non condensing Vibration 9 80665m s 1G less than 20Hz 5 88m s 0 6G at 20 to 50Hz Environmental Conditions ae CEAO Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 A 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Aw
267. ion Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Multi function Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Multi function Output Terminal MO6 RA6 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Settings 0 to 21 Factory Setting 0 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON J Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed a Minimum Output Frequency i Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to Pr 06 03 4 Over Torque Detection Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B i 5 during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi Indication function input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected 7 Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal Active when a fault occurs oc ov OH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF 4 168 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Desired Frequency i 9 Active when the desired frequency Pr 03 02 is attained Attained Terminal Count Value
268. ion frequency J Pr 12 26 to Pr 12 31 can be used to set the frequency command by adjusting analog input voltage 10V to 10V Refer to Pr 04 00 to 04 03 for details 4 176 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Pulse generator card PG card is mainly applied in the detection components of speed control or position control It usually makes a closed loop speed control system with encoder The AC motor drive is used with encoder and PG card to have a complete speed control and position detection system Please make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details 13 00 PG Input Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable PG 1 Single phase 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation m P D There are two outputs 1 phase and 2 phase output for the encoder output For the 1 phase output the encoder output is a group of pulse signal For the 2 phase output the encoder can output A and B pulse signals with 90 phase difference The encoder is defined by the timing of A and B pulses as the following figure It can not only measure the speed but distinguish motor rotation direction by A and B pulse signals PG card r
269. is proportional to the integral of the controller input To eliminate the steady state error an integral part needs to be added to the controller The integral time decides the relation between integral part and error The integral part will be increased by time even if the error is small It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it is 0 In this way a system can be stable without steady state error by proportional gain control and integral time control Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 157 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 3 Differential control D the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input During elimination of the error oscillation or instability may occur The differential control can be used to suppress these effects by acting before the error That is when the error is near O the differential control should be 0 Proportional gain P differential control D can be used to improve the system state during PID adjustment D When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application Set the application s constant pressure value bar to be the setpoint of PID control The pressure sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value After comparing the PID setpoint and PID feedback there will be an error Thus the PID controller
270. ission errors occurs Q Setting 0 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running The warning message can be cleared after the communication is normal qg Setting 1 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will stop by the deceleration time Pr 01 10 01 12 It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message gq Setting 2 When transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop immediately It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message AA Setting 3 When transmission errors occur it won t display any warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will still keep running gq See list of error messages below see section 3 6 in Pr 09 04 Pra The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals 09 11 X Time out Detection for USB Card Unit second Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable _09 12 COM port for PLC Communication NOT for VFD E C models Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 RS485 1 USB card 4 156 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2
271. l Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2 Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time once one of them acts and the other won t act This is called interlock Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time Y1 and Y2 won t act at the same time due to up to down scan of ladder diagram For this ladder diagram Y1 has higher priority than Y2 Example 6 Sequential Control x1 X3 Y2 Example 7 Oscillating Circuit The period of oscillating circuit is A T AT Y1 If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND function as shown in the left side Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting In this way Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential T OI Lo L 14 AT AT The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1 In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1 Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON Finally coil Y1 will be OFF The result of repeated scan coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle time A T On A T Off Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 15 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The tina circuitry of cycle time A T
272. l cause the machine vibration it can increase Pr 07 09 setting to solve this problem at this moment AR Too long time constants set Pr 07 08 and Pr 07 09 to 10 give slow response too short values can give unstable operation Please set by your applications 07 10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time Min Settings 0 Factory Display 0 Displays 0 1439 07 11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time Day Settings 0 Factory Display 0 Displays 0 65535 aa Pr 07 10 and Pr 07 11 are used to record the motor operation time They can be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 121 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters When setting Pr 07 11 to 0 it will reset the accumulative motor operation time and the record will be reset to 0 07 12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable 07 14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level Unit V Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 2 4 gq When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower To prevent overheating it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive s corresponding control terminals an When the source o
273. lay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor it may malfunction especially for 460V series even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft 50m or less To prevent it please use AC reactor and or lower the carrier frequency Pr 02 03 PWM carrier frequency fee Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor drive E If the length is too long the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause leakage current It will activate the protection of over current increase leakage current or not insure the correction of current display The worst case is that AC motor drive may damage E If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive the total wiring length is the sum of the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 43 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories This page intentionally left blank B 44 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large it cannot offer complete protec
274. lease refer to the following figure for the decreasing the PWM carrier frequency It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s life Example for 460V models Assume the carrier frequency to be 15kHz the ambient temperature is 35 degrees C with a single AC motor drive mounting method A If the output current exceeds 80 rated current 4 70 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following figure If output current is 100 rated current the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to 12kHz Mounting method MethodA FrameA Frame B amp C Method B FrameA Frame B amp C ison oO The relation between rated current and carrier frequency A a 25 with mounting method A 100 15 C with mounting method B 90 35 C with mounting method A D 25 C with mounting method B 80 PNE 50 C with mounting method A 70 40 C with mounting method B 3 60 50 40 gt Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14kHz15kHz Frequency 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 115V 230V Series Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 71 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CA
275. led by ACI DC 4 20mA and the second frequency press source is controlled by AVI DC 0 10V These two frequencies can be added or subtracted by Pr 02 10 An Related parameters Pr 02 00 Source of First Master Frequency Command and Pr 02 09 Source of Second Frequency Command 02 02 Stop Method Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 STOP ramp to stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop 4 60 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters aa When the 2 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the motor stop method Pr 02 02 will force setting to 1 This setting Pr 02 02 can t be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF EE an E F is external fault It can be triggered by setting one of Pr 04 05 04 08 to 14 When the AC motor drive receives the trigger it will stop output immediately and display EF on the keypad The motor won t run till the fault is cleared enter RESET AR The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop command or detects External Fault Ramp the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 according to the deceleration time Pr 0
276. level and pop it out from stack Because it is the last item of the horizontal line it means the status of this horizontal line is ending MPS I Co 2 You can recognize this command by the symbol MPS C L Basically that is all right to use the above Zj C9 MRD method to analyze but sometimes compiler will 4p MPP p gt omit the same outputs as shown at the right MER N m D 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program E Start Stop and Latching In the same occasions it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch Therefore if you want to keep the action you should design latching circuit There are several latching circuits in the following Example 1 the latching circuit for priority of stop When start normally open contact X1 On stop Y1 ne normally contact X2 Off and Y1 On are set at e STOP the same time if X2 On the coil Y1 will stop s acting Therefore it calls priority of stop UART Example 2 the latching circuit for priority of start When start normally open contact X1 On stop X1 x2 normally contact X2 Off and Y1 0n coil Y1 will START STOP Y1 be active and latching are valid at the same time if X2 0n coil Y1 will be active due to latched contact Therefore it calls priority of start Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 13 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com
277. log Output Used by PLC Bit0 1 AFM used by PLC NOT for VFD E C Bitt 1 AO1 used by PLC models Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC 03 11 Brake Release 0 00 to 20 00Hz cae Frequency Brake Engage Frequency 0 00 to 20 00Hz Read only BitO RLY Status Bit1 MO1 Status Display the Status of Bit2 MO2 RA2 Status Multi function Bit3 MO3 RA3 Status Output Terminals Bit4 MO4 RA4 Status Bit5 MO5 RAS5 Status Bit6 MO6 RA6 Status Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Desired Frequency 03 1 2 Attained CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 04 00 04 01 04 02 04 03 04 04 04 05 04 06 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Keypad Potentiometer Gain Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable 2 wire 3 wire Operation Control Modes Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 04 07 04 08 4 12 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 0 Positive bias 1 Negative bias 0 1 to 200 0 100 0 p 0 No negative bias command Negative bias REV motion enabled 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP 2 wire FWD REV RU
278. maximally lowered to 70 of the normal output voltage Output Frequency Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 133 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 08 18 Automatic Voltage Regulation AVR Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVR function enabled 1 AVR function disabled 2 AVR function disabled for deceleration 3 AVR function disabled for stop 4 134 08 19 The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V 200VAC 50Hz 60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50HZz 60Hz Therefore when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12 20 its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature failing insulation and unstable torque output AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum Output Voltage Pr 01 02 For instance if Pr 01 02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC Setting 0 when AVR function is enabled the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual DC bus voltage The output voltage won t be changed by DC bus volta
279. metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 41 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding saddle Saddle on one end The length of motor cable When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type the motor terminals will experience surge voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance When the motor cable is very long especially for the 460V series surge voltages may reduce insulation quality To prevent this situation please follow the rules below m Use a motor with enhanced insulation Connect an output reactor optional to the output terminals of the AC motor drive E The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible 10 to 20 m or less E For models 7 5hp 5 5kW and above Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V AGOVAC input voltage 66 ft 20m 328 ft 100m 1312 ft 400m 230VAC input voltage 1312 ft 400m 1312 ft 400m 1312 ft 400m B 42 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories gt tae When a thermal O L re
280. meter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over torque OL2 is detected via the following method 1 if the output current exceeds the over torque detection level Pr 06 04 and the detection time is longer than the setting of Pr 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time the warning message OL2 is displayed on digital keypad optional It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message 2 If a Multi function Output Terminal is set to over torque detection Pr 03 00 03 01 04 the output is on Please refer to Pr 03 00 03 01 for details 4 110 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters an Setting 1 or 2 it is used to detect with constant speed For setting 2 it will free run to stop after over torque is detected aa Setting 3 or 4 it is used to detect during acceleration For setting 4 it will free run to stop after over torque is detected aa Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Pr 06 01 Over Current Stall Prevention during Accel Pr 06 02 Over Current Stall Prevention during Operation Pr 06 04 Over Torque Detection Level and Pr 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time Tai a Over Torque Detection Level OL2 Unit Settings 10 to 200 Factory Setting 150 Over Torque Detection Time OL2 Unit
281. mit Speed Feedback rs 413 06 Display Filter 0 t0939 ams soo J Detection Time for 0 0 disabled Feedback Signal 1 Fault 0 1 to 10 0 sec 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the Feedback Signal 1 Warn and COAST to stop 1 Fault 2 Warn and keep operation wi3 o9 Speed Feedback to 9999 2ms 16 Filter Source of the High 9 PG card Read speed Counter 1 PLC NOT for VFD E C models Only 4 32 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 4 2 Parameter Settings for Applications Speed Search Applications Purpose Functions ae Windmill winding Restart free Before the free running motor is 08 04 08 08 machine fan and all running motor completely stopped it can be restarted inertia loads without detection of motor speed The AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed DC Brake before Running Applications Purpose Functions Pein When e g windmills Keep the free If the running direction of the free 08 00 fans and pumps rotate running motor at running motor is not steady please 08 01 freely by wind or flow standstill execute DC brake before start up without applying power Energy Saving Applications Purpose Functions Biever Punching machines Energy savin
282. motor drives to prevent mutual heating Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation Ww 4 j g A 150mm 120mm 450mm 4 i ro gt JIA B Lel L x 4 N 50mm i a A B 50mm a Air flow gt v i TF 150mm 120mm 150mm id Y FrameA Frame Brcandip Frame A Frame B Cand D Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel 1 This function is not for VFD E T series 2 The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel Only the same power system and capacity can be connected in parallel oo Pw It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel no limit in horsepower but these 5 drives should be the same power system and capacity power should be applied at the same time only the same power system and capacity can be connected in parallel Power 208 220 230 380 440 480 depend on models F U c Ny Brake module IM IM IM IM For frame A terminal is connected to the terminal of
283. n Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 6 7 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Keypad http www automatedpt com Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there are any loose or missing Tighten or replace the screw o screws If machine or insulator is Visual inspection deformed cracked damaged or g o with changed color change due NOTE Please ignore the color to overheating or ageing change of copper plate If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection O Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection O Any missing characters Visual inspection O hanical parts Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year j mere Sany abnormal sourd Visual and aural inspection O or vibration If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws O If any part is deformed or x damaged Visual inspection O If there is any color change by Visual inspection o overheating If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection O 6 8 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929
284. n eH Or i PRO MODE DR y 7y v XX Press UP key to select i SAVE or READ MODE PROG T Press PROG DATA for gt about 2 seconds or until gt XX XX lt gt 7 it is flashing then save 5 parameters from PU06 to PRO c AC drive or read parameters MODE i 4 DATA LO from AC drive to PU06 XXXXXK A Y Adjust APO Number PROG DAT Cannot Succeed to write in Write in Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com B 8 KPE LE02 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 8 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE LE02 STOP 7 RESET Status Display uP and DOWN Key Display the driver s current status Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency LED Display MODE Indicates frequency voltage current user Change between different display mode defined units and etc Potentiometer STOP RESET For master Frequency setting Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred RUN Key ENTER Start AC drive operation Used to enter modify programming parameters Display Message Descriptions RUNS estor FWDe REV 8 le Displays the AC drive Master Frequency Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 RUNe jestoP Fwoe REV e e RUN e jestoP Fwoe REV e e RUNe estor FwDe REV 6 e User defined unit where U F x Pr 00 05 Dis
285. n Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 93 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Quick Stop 23 ONLY for It is only valid when Pr 02 01 is set to 5 in VFD E C models VFD E C models When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is Download Execute enabled it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can Monitor PLC 24 Program PLC2 download execute monitor PLC When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 NOT for VFD E C models When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status Simple position This function should be used with Pr 01 20 Pr 01 25 for simple 25 function position Refer to Pr 01 25 for details The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with F OOB Out of PLC for washing machine When this setting is enabled it will get Balance Detection A9 value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t A9 value Pr 08 23 Motor selection bit When this setting is enabled it can be used for motor selection 27 0 Pr 01 01 01 06 01 26 01 43 07 18 07 38 07 00 07 06
286. n off the power o vibration before operation to see if it rotates smoothly If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw O If there is any change of color due Change fan o to overheating Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any obstruction in the Visual inspection o heat sink air intake or air outlet P Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 6 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance This page intentionally left blank 6 12 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix A Specifications There are 115V 230V and 460V models in the VFD E series For 115V models it is 1 phase models For 0 25 to 3HP of the 230V models there are 1 phase 3 phase models Refer to following specifications for details Voltage Class 115V Class o Rated Output Capacity kVA __o6 10 _ d Te 42 x 3 Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage O Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 Single phase Rated Input Current A 6 9 18 D S w 7 Rated Voltage Frequency Single phase 100 120V 50 60Hz a Voltage Tolerance 10 90 132 V Frequency Tolerance 5 47 63 Hz
287. n t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6051 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes junit must be 100ms and can t be set to 0 vl ramp function 0x604F 0 time E 12 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function RW Size Unit Map NOTE 0 disable drive function 1 slow down on slow down ramp 2 slow down on quick stop ramp 2th decel time Factory Index Sub Definition Setting Quick stop option Ox605A 0 ode 2 RW S16 1ms Yes 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP ox6o60 o Mode of 2 RO U8 Yes Speed mode operation oxe061 o Mode of 2 RO UB Yes operation display E 2 How to Control by CANopen To control the AC motor drive by CANopen please set parameters by the following steps Step 1 Operation source setting set Pr 02 01 to 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled Step 2 Frequency source setting set Pr 02 00 to 5 CANopen communication Step 3 CANopen station setting set Pr 09 13 CANopen Communication Address 1 127 Step 4 CANopen baud rate setting set Pr 09 14 CANBUS Baud Rate Step 5 Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary
288. nction Input Terminal Settings Read Only Factory display 63 Display BitO MI1 Status Bit1 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 MI4 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 99 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Bit5 MI6 Status Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status an The multi function input terminals are falling edge triggered For standard AC motor drive without extension card there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr 04 26 will display 63 111111 for no action Weights 22 2 2 2 2 O Active C For Example If Pr 04 26 displays 52 it means MI1 MI2 and Ml4 are active The display value 52 32 16 4 1 X 2 1X 2f 1X 2 bit 6 X 2 bit 5 X 2f bit 3 X 2 Weights 2 97 9 9 of 93 9 91 9 O Active i 1 0 Bit o o 7 7 o 7 o o lt mi1 MI9 When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 4 100 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Active Weights OEE Bit Mbolo Je 7 lo s 4l
289. nd also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel such as button switch relay timer counter and etc The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit such as relay coil and contact It doesn t have the real components in it In PLC it just has a basic unit of internal memory If this bit is 1 it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0 it means the coil is OFF You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Open NO or contact a Otherwise you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Closed NC or contact b Many relays will need many bits such as 8 bits makes up a byte 2 bytes can make up a word 2 words makes up double word When using many relays to do calculation such as add subtraction or shift you could Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 7 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function use byte word or double word Furthermore the two equipments timer and counter in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times In conclusion each internal storage unit occ
290. ndication Fault indication Multi function Desired frequency 1 attained 11 02 Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Terminal count value attained Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Multi function Over Current Stall supervision 11 03 Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Multi function 3 iF d d 11 04 Output Terminal ey een MO6 RA6 Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 27 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Factory Customer Setting 11 05 11 06 11 07 11 08 11 09 11 10 11 11 4 28 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Multi function Input Terminal MI9 Multi function Input Terminal MI10 Multi function Input Terminal MI11 Multi function Input Terminal MI12 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com 21 Brake control Desired frequency attained 22 Drive ready 23 Desired frequency 2 attained No function Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base block Up Increment master fr
291. nge or RTU Remote Terminal Unit Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr 09 04 Code Description The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset Therefore there is at least 1 second delay time in master station ASCII mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters For example a 1 byte data 64 Hex shown as 64 in ASCII consists of 6 36Hex and 4 34Hex Character o T 2 3 4 5 6 T ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H Character 8 9 A B C D F ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H RTU mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two 4 bit hexadecimal characters For example 64 Hex 2 Data Format 10 bit character frame For ASCII Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 7 N 2 Stop Stop ae ate 8 bit bit lt 7 bit character 10 bit character frame 7 E 1 Re 12 3 4 8 6 Even Stop parity bit lt T___ 7 bit character __ 10 bit character frame 7 0 1 0 1 253 15455 6 Odd Stop parity bit lt _____ 7 bit character __ lt _ 10 bit character frame 7 N
292. nit 2 msec RS485 BUS PC or PLC command Response Message of AC Drive Handling time Response Delay Time of AC drive Pr 09 07 Max 6msec UAE Transmission Speed for USB Card Factory Setting 2 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps 4 Baud rate 57600 bps aa This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card 09 09 A Communication Protocol for USB Card Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt 2 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt 3 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt 4 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt 5 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt 6 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt 7 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt 8 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt 9 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt a 09 10 X Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 155 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters aa This parameter is set to how to react when transm
293. nnect the RS 485 port between VFD E and this communication module for power This communication module will perform the function once it is connected Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications B 10 1 5 LEDs Display SP Green LED means in normal condition Red LED means abnormal condition Module Green blinking LED means no I O data transmission Green steady LED means I O data transmission OK Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal Network Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal Red LED means abnormal gt iia Refer to user manual for detail information Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 29 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 LonWorks Communication Module CME LW01 B 10 2 1 Introduction Device CME LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk CME LW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network No need to set CME LW01 address This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME LW01 that is used to communicate with Delta VFD E firmware version of VFD E should conform with CME LW01 according to the table below via LonWorks Network B 10 2 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 t 59 7 2 35 H 57 3 2 26 _
294. ntrol mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of the AC motor drive 07 05 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 0 Unit mQ Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 gq The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter The user may also set this parameter without using Pr 07 04 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Aa It can be used to set the motor rated slip Users need to input the actual rated rom shown on the nameplate of the motor gq Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the following equation to calculate the rated slip Rated Slip HZ Foase Pr 01 01 base frequency rated rpm x motor pole 120 Example Assume that the rated frequency of the motor is 60Hz with 4 poles and the rated rom is 1650rpm The rated slip calculated by the formula should be 60Hz 1650X4 120 5Hz an This parameter has relation with Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 To get the best slip compensation effect it needs to input the correct setting The incorrect setting may cause the invalid function and even damage the motor and drive Related parameter Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 0707 Slip Compensation Limit Unit Settings 0 to 250 Factory Setting 200 gq This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency the percentage of
295. number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to no represent the four numbers of decimal number BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7 segment display to be display 5 Hexadecimal Number HEX The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP PLC system E To be operand in application command For example MOV H1A2B DO constant H Constant K In PLC it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number For example K100 means 100 in decimal number Exception The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X Y M S will be bit byte word or double word For example K2Y10 K4M100 K1 means a 4 bit data and K2 K4 can be 8 12 and 16 bit data separately Constant H In PLC it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number For example H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number D 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay There are output coil and A B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y It is unlimited usage times in program User can control loop by using auxiliary relay but can t drive external load directly There are two types divided by its characteristics 1 Auxiliary relay for general It will reset to Off when power loss during running Its state will be Off when power on after power loss 2 Auxiliary relay for special Each special auxiliary relay has its special function Please don t use undefined auxiliary rel
296. o 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 1204 Max AVI3 Input Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 171 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters a Max AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 a Min ACI2 Input Current Unit mA Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 12 07 Min ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 12 08 Max ACI2 Input Current Unit mA Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 12 09 Max ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 1240 Al2 Function Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback 12 41 Al2 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVI4 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V AA Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch 4 172 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2
297. of parameters to PUO6 read 0 read 3 Press A to change the mode to SAVE Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing then write the parameters from the digital keypad PUO6 to AC drive If it has saved it will show the type of AC motor drive http www automatedpt com B 19 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Display Message CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Descriptions The specified parameter setting The actual value stored in the specified parameter External Fault End displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have Cc been accepted After a parameter value has been set the new value is C ng automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the A or v keys Z cro Err displays if the input is invalid a a I0 Communication Error Please check the AC motor drive user manual E C I Chapter 5 Group 9 Communication Parameter for more details http www automatedpt com B 7 3 Operation Flow Chart VFD PU06 Operation Flow Chart B 20 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Press UP DOWN key to change frequency commands a gt a press RIGHT LEFT key to adjus number A A MODE MODE MODE vone move AA Y y F nine nine i
298. of the high speed counter C235 high byte R D1027 Frequency command of the PID control R The value of AVI analog voltage input 0 10V corresponds to 0 D1028 1023 The value of ACI analog current input 4 20mA corresponds to 0 D1029 1023 or the value of AVI2 analog voltage input 0 10V R corresponds to 0 1023 D1030 The value of V R digital keypad 0 10V corresponds to 0 1023 R D1031 D1035 Reserved D1036 PLC error code R D1037 D1039 Reserved D1040 Analog output value R W D1041 D1042 Reserved User defined when Pr 00 04 is set to 2 the register data will be D1048 displayed as C xxx R W D1044 High speed counter mode R W D 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode Device Range Type Address Hex X 00 17 octal Bit 0400 040F Y 00 17 octal Bit 0500 050F T 00 15 Bit word 0600 060F M 000 159 Bit 0800 089F M 1000 1031 Bit OBE8 0C07 Cc 0 7 Bit word 0E00 0E07 D 00 63 Word 1000 101D D 1000 1044 Word 13E8 1414 D 26 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function NOTE when it is in PLC1 mode the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT the device For example address 0400H will correspond to Pr 04 00 NOT X0 D 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 mode
299. om CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com ERROR LED Single Flash Red Warning limit reached Double Flash Red Error control event Red ON SP LED LED Blinki Red mang CRC check error Connection failure No connection Red ON LED Blinking CME COP01 returns error Green code LED Descriptions Appendix B Accessories Indication CME COP01 is working condition At least one of error counter of the CANopen controller has reached or exceeded the warning level too many error frames A guard event or heartbeat event has occurred The CANopen controller is bus off Indication No power on CME COP01 card Check your communication setting in VFD E drives 19200 lt 8 N 2 gt RTU 1 Check the connection between VFD E drive and CME COP01 card is correct 2 Re wire the VFD E connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct Check the PLC program ensure the index and sub index is correct Communication is normal State Description LED ON Constantly on LED OFF Constantly off LED blinking Flash on for 0 2s and off for 0 2s LED single On for 0 2s and off for 1s flash ua On for 0 2s off for 0 2s on for 0 2s and off for 1s Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 37 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 11 DIN Rail B 11 1 MKE DRA B 38 T
300. on CNT 16 bit counter C K C0 C7 KO K32 767 Operand C D C0 C7 DO D29 Explanations 1 When the CNT command is executed from OFF gt ON which means that the counter coil is driven and 1 should thus be added to the counter s value when the counter achieved specific set value value of counter the setting value motion of the contact is as follows NO Normally Open contact Continuity NC Normally Closed contact Non continuity 2 If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained the contacts and the counting values will be unchanged To re count or to conduct the CLEAR motion please use the RST command Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0 C2 counte Heen a Law ial CNT C2K100 Setting is K100 Mnemonic Function MC MCR Master control Start Reset Operand NO N7 Explanations 1 MC is the main control start command When the MC command is executed the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted When MC command is OFF the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows The counting value is set back to zero the coil and the contact te are both turned OFF The coil is OFF and the timer value and the contact stay at their Accumulative timer p present condition The counting value is back to zero Both coil and contact are Subro
301. on 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Sudden increase in motor loading Check for possible motor stall 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model oom Over current during constant speed operation 1 When multi function input terminals MI3 MI9 ec are set to external fault the AC motor drive cf External Fault stops output U V and W 2 Give RESET command after fault has been cleared E F ig Internal EEPROM can not be Return to the factory programmed crs Internal EEPROM can not be n Internal EEPROM can not be 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to creu read factory setting 2 Return to the factory 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to n c 2 pes EEPROM can not be factory setting 2 Return to the factory c E 30 U phase error Fai eet P Return to the factory cE3 OVorLV erg aes Temperature sensor error ch as Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 6 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Name When one of the output terminal s is grounded short circuit current is more than 50 of AC motor drive rated current the AC motor drive power module may be damaged NOTE The sho
302. on Common for Multi function Outputs 10V_ Potentiometer power supply 10VDC 3mA Analog voltage Input Impedance 47KQ 10V avi circuit Resolution 10 bits Range 0 10VDC AVI 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 internal circuit Set up Pr 04 11 Pr 04 14 04 19 04 23 ACM Common for AVI ACI AFM Analog current Input Impedance 2500 100kQ tii ary aa Resolution 10 bits Range 4 20mA ACI P 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 ACM internal circuit Set up Pr 04 15 Pr 04 18 Analog output meter 0 to 10V 2mA Do jieu Impedance 100kQ AEM Output current 2mA max ai patentiometer Resolution 8 bits ax 2m4 Range 0 10VDC internal circuit ACM Function Pr 03 03 to Pr 03 04 NOTE Control signal wiring size 18 AWG 0 75 mm with shielded wire Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 19 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Analog inputs AVI ACI ACM a Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible lt 20m with proper grounding If the noise is inductive connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement a If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive please connect a c
303. on Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Ladder diagram Command code Operation xO X1 LDF X0 Start X0 falling edge detection H K C v1 AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDP Rising edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Explanations ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo x1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 m i i ANDP X1 X1 rising edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDF Falling edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v 2a Explanations ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo x1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 m n SKD ANDF X1 X1 falling edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 41 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com
304. on is completed CME PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD E B 10 3 5 PROFIBUS Address son as as D lt E CME PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address The set value via 2 address switches ADDH and ADDL is in HEX format ADDH sets the upper 4 bits and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 33 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Address Meaning 1 0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address 0 or Ox7E 0xFE Invalid PROFIBUS address B 10 4 CME COP01 CANopen CME COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Delta VFD E AC motor drive B 10 4 1 Product Profile COM port CANopen connection port RUN indicator ERROR indicator SP Scan Port indicator Baud rate switch 89 9 E e6 e e e Unit mm Address switch B 10 4 2 Specifications CANopen Connection Interface Pluggable connector 5 08mm Transmission method CAN Transmission cable 2 wire twisted shielded cable Electrical isolation 500V DC B 34 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories Communication
305. ontrol doesn t stop working until error is 0 The integral is acted by the integral time The smaller integral time is set the stronger integral action will be It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to make a stable system At this moment the decreasing error will be slow The integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller aa This parameter is used to set the integral time of controller When the integral time is long it will have small gain of controller the slower response and bad external control When the integral time is short it will have large gain of controller the faster response and rapid external control aa When the integral time is too small it may cause system oscillation AR When it is set to 0 0 the integral function is disabled 1305 X Speed Control Output Frequency Limit Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 100 00Hz Factory Setting 10 00 aa This parameter is used to limit the max output frequency aa From the following PG speed diagram output frequency H frequency command F speed detection value via PG feedback With the speed change of motor load the speed change will be sent to drive via PG card to change the output frequency So this parameter can be used to decrease the speed change of motor load 13 06 X Speed Feedback Display Filter Unit 2ms Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 500 aa When Pr 0 04
306. or 0 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 co 4 46 This parameter sets the Mid Point Frequency of the V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequency Pr 01 01 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com BBB Be D CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Please note that unsuitable setting may cause over current it may cause motor overheat and damage motor or trigger the over current protection Please note that unsuitable setting may cause insufficient motor torque When it is vector control the settings of Pr 01 03 Pr 01 04 and Pr 01 06 are invalid This setting must be greater than Pr 01 05 Related parameters Pr 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Pr 01 04 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 This parameter sets the Mid Point Voltage of any V f curve With this settin
307. or analog voltage signal AVI2 Pr 04 19 should be set to 1 When ACi AVI switch is not set by Pr 04 19 the keypad optional will display fault code AErr and needs to press RESET to clear it an The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values The min and max frequencies are based on Pr 01 00 during open loop control as shown in the following A _01 00 D a She ee E i I 0V Ea T hon es ee ee 04 18 1 04 23 1 I I I I 04 12 i 04 16 1 04 21 104 11 104 13 l 104 15 104 17 I 104 20 104 22 A analog input 20mA 10V Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 87 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 01 00 60 00 Hz 04 14 70 04 18 50 04 12 30 04 16 0 analog input 04 11 0V 04 15 4mA 04 13 10V 04 17 20mA IPRIT SE Multi function Input Terminal M11 MI2 2 wire 3 wire Operation Control Modes Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP 1 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 2 3 wire Operation gq There are three different types of control modes External Terminal 04 04 2 wire FWD STOP e MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE FWD 0 FWD STOP REV STOP o MI2 OPEN STOP CLOSE REV REV STOP 2 wire RUN STOP lt e MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE RUN 1 FWD REV FWD REV o MI2 OPEN FWD CLOSE R
308. ose Functions Parameters P P When executing Base Block a signal 03 00 03 01 ee Provide a signal for General application is given for external system or control running status Fi wiring Overheat Warning for Heat Sink Applications Purpose Functions Related PP p Parameters When heat sink is overheated it will 03 00 03 01 General application For safety send a signal for external system or control wiring Multi function Analog Output Applications Purpose Functions Related Parameters The value of frequency output 03 06 re Display running current voltage can be read by General application status connecting a frequency meter or voltage current meter Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 37 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings Group 0 User Parameters A This parameter can be set during operation 00 00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting aa Pr 00 00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive The capacity rated current rated voltage and the max carrier frequency relate to the identity code Users can use the following table
309. otor speed This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control an This parameter setting is the resolution of encoder With the higher resolution the speed control will be more precise 13 02 Motor Pole Number Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 2to 10 Factory Setting 4 gq The pole number should be even can t be odd a X Proportional Gain P Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 qg This parameter is used to set the gain P when using PG for the closed loop speed control an The proportional gain is mainly used to eliminate the error The large proportional gain P will get the faster response to decrease the error Too large proportional gain will cause large overshoot and oscillation and decrease the stable 4 178 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters aa This parameter can be used to set the proportional gain P to decide the response speed With large proportional gain it will get faster response Too large proportional gain may cause system oscillation With small proportional gain it will get slower response A Integral Gain 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 00 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable aa The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system The integral c
310. otor Drive motor drive operates more than one motor please pay attention to starting and changing the motor Power Transmission Mechanism Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors gearboxes belts and chains etc over longer periods at low speeds At high speeds of 50 60Hz and above lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur Motor torque The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power are different Below you ll find the torque speed characteristics of a standard motor 4 pole 15kW AC motor drive 180 155A 60 seconds 140 lt continuous L 100 Z 80 2 0320 60 120 Frequency Hz Base freq 60Hz V F for 220V 60Hz 1440 5 60 seconds 130 continuous 100 857 1 S 68 2 ASHES 0320 50 120 Frequency Hz Base freq 50Hz V F for 220V 50Hz Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 torque 180 150 100 80 45 35 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Motor 60 seconds cont inuous 320 60 120 Frequency Hz Base freq 60Hz V F for 220V 60H zZ 60 seconds continuous 320 50 120 Frequency Hz Base freq 50Hz V F for 220V 50Hz C 7 http Awww au
311. oughly prior to installation and operation When using with the brake resistor or brake unit it needs to disable over voltage stall prevention function set Pr 06 00 to 0 It is recommended to disable AVR auto voltage regulation function set Pr 08 18 to 1 Definition for Brake Usage ED Explanation The definition of the barking usage ED is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking When the brake resistor heats up the resistance would increase with temperature and brake torque would decrease accordingly Suggested cycle time is one minute 100 ED T1 T0x100 Brake Time Cycle Time 0 For safety reasons install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor Together with the magnetic contactor MC in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929
312. overheating and thus extends IGBT s life If the user wants to fix carrier within the rated range and won t change by the change of the surrounding temperature and frequently load Please refer to Pr 02 18 for Selection of Carrier Modulation aa Related parameters Pr 02 18 Selection of Carrier Modulation and Pr 03 08 Fan Control 02 04 Motor Direction Control Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Forward Reverse operation enabled 1 Reverse operation disabled 2 Forward operation disabled aa This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation to prevent damage due to operation errors aa The motor direction also can be limited by setting one of Pr 04 05 04 08 to 21 jaa Related parameters Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 02 05 Line Start Lockout Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 63 CALL NOW 800
313. p Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 5 05 00 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 05 05 05 06 05 07 05 08 05 09 05 10 05 11 05 12 05 13 05 14 Multi step Speeds Parameters A 1st Step Speed Frequency http Awww automatedpt com Unit Hz A 2nd Step Speed Frequency A 3rd Step Speed Frequency X 4th Step Speed Frequency A Sth Step Speed Frequency X 6th Step Speed Frequency A Tth Step Speed Frequency A 8th Step Speed Frequency A 9th Step Speed Frequency X 10th Step Speed Frequency A 11th Step Speed Frequency 12th Step Speed Frequency 13th Step Speed Frequency X 14th Step Speed Frequency A 15th Step Speed Frequency Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 AA The Multi function Input Terminals refer to setting 1 4 of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 are used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi step speeds max 15 speeds The speeds frequencies are determined by Pr 05 00 to 05 14 as shown in the following Aa The operation time of multi step speeds can be set by PLC program keypad communication via Pr 02 01 AA The run stop command can be controlled by the external terminal digital AA Each one of multi step speeds can be set within 0 0 600 0Hz during operation AA These parameters can be applied in small machinery
314. p Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters AR This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter To increase the internal counter one of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 should be set to 12 Upon completion of counting the specified output terminal will be activated Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 11 an It can be used as an indication for the AC motor drive run in low speed to stop an Related parameters Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Pr 04 05 Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Pr 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 Pr 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 and Pr 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 aa Example The timing diagram for Pr 03 05 5 and Pr 03 06 3 880 8003 Display lt 0000 lt 000 0082 0803 c0004 c000 c0802 2msecle Pr 00 04 1 TRG Counter Trigger i The width of trigger sial Preliminary Count Value i should not be less than Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 11 y 03 05 5 03 06 3 2ms lt 250 Hz Terminal Count Value j Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 10 03 07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Terminal count value attained no EF display 1 Terminal count value attained EF active AR The E F is external fault It needs to set one of Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 14 to active the terminal AA If this parameter i
315. p Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 1 Over Current OC ocA ocd oc Over current Over current Over current during acceleration during deceleration v Remove short circuit PERGEN Check if there is any short circuits and or ground fault grounding between the U V W and motor No No Reduce the load or Yes increase the power Check if load is too large of AC motor drive No No No Reduce torque compensation compensation Yes Reduce torque compensation a Check if Check i No is too short by is too short by load inertia load inertia No acceleration time deceleration time Yes Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error 4 due to noise Please contact DELTA la N a oea Yes Yy y Yes Ca acceleration Yes Can deceleration T time be made longer time be made longer No No v Increase accel decel Reduce load or increase time the power of AC motor drive Yy w Reduce load or increase Check braking H the power of AC motor method Please drive contact DELTA Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 5 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com
316. p 0 User Parameters Factory Setting 00 00 Identity Code of the Read only AC motor drive Parameter Explanation Settings Customer 00 01 Rated Current Read only Display of the AC motor drive 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit Start up Display Uxxx w 90 03 Selection 3 Multifunction display see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 NOT for VFD E C models 00 04 Content of Multi 0 Display the content of user defined unit function Display Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C NOT for VFD E C models 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E 4 2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings sald Customer 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 6 Output power factor angl
317. p and decrease in speed 4 118 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no load current Pr 07 01 the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter When Pr 00 10 is set from V f mode to vector mode this parameter will be set to 1 00 automatically When Pr 00 10 is set from vector mode to V f mode this parameter will be set to 0 00 Please using this function after load is added and acceleration with gradual increasing compensation That is add the output frequency with Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 X Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 on the output frequency EZI Motor Parameters Auto Tuning Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Auto Tuning R1 motor doesn t run 2 Auto Tuning R1 No load Test with running motor Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2 When setting to 1 it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr 07 01 must be input manually When set to 2 the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 will be set automatic
318. pad DiMeNsiOns seeieeiereeiisrrrrresrriresrirrreriesrsrrsnn B 24 B 9 Extension Card ccc 0cc ieee ee wine B 25 B 9 1 Relay Card ccc sce EAE TE T B 25 B 9 2 Digital V O Card 22 22 2 cover ea scha ev hohe gtd eth Meet aha B 26 B 9 3 Analog I O Card 00 eeccceeeenneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeenaeees B 26 B 9 4 Communication Card e ee ceeeceeeceeesneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeenaeees B 26 B 9 5 Speed Feedback Card ou eeceecceeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeenaeees B 27 B 10 Fieldbus Modules sisii unian B 27 B 10 1 DeviceNet Communication Module CME DNO1 B 27 B 10 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions eee eee B 27 B 10 1 2 Wiring and Settings eee eeeeneeeeeeneeeenneeeeneas B 28 B 10 1 3 Mounting Method 0 ec eeeesneeeeeeeeeeenneeeseenaeeeeeneeeeneaa B 28 B 10 1 4 Power Supply ccceeeceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeenneeeeneaa B 29 B 10 1 5 LEDS Display aisi ernaia ain a apia estetis B 29 B 10 2 LonWorks Communication Module CME LW01 seese B 30 B 10 2 1 INMOCUCHION sivocisicnsei renerien pennaenn neiitran B 30 B 10 2 2 DIMENSIONS iesite iid en idia B 30 B 10 2 3 SpecificatiohS iaiiaeeeai aa aK iia B 30 B 10 24 WiN ienien e i ea ion B 31 B 10 2 5 LED Indications sc c nurs aes B 31 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com B 10 3 Profibus Communication Module CME PD01 eee B 31
319. pad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only Not for VFD E C model Ra This parameter is used to save keypad or RS 485 frequency command Q Setting 0 After the AC motor drive is power off save keypad and communication frequency in the AC motor drive Q Setting 1 After the AC motor drive is power off only save keypad frequency in the AC motor drive and won t save communication frequency na Setting 2 After the AC motor drive is power off only save communication frequency in the AC motor drive and won t save keypad frequency Q The keypad or communication frequency only can be saved when Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 0 the source of frequency is from keypad or Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 3 the source of frequency is from communication qg Related parameters Pr 02 00 Source of First Master Frequency Command and Pr 02 09 Source of Second Frequency Command 4 68 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Initial Frequency Selection for keypad amp RS485 USB Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By Current Freq Command 1 By Zero Freq Command 2 By Frequency Display at Stop 02 15 Initial Frequency Setpoint for keypad amp RS485 USB Unit Hz Settings 0 00 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 aa These parameters are used to determinate the frequ
320. peSi si een anne wei aia D 23 D 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays 0 0 0 eecceeeeeeeeeeenneeeenneeeeeeneeeenenaees D 24 D 4 9 Special RegISt rS iztea abi Heeceece este dated ai D 25 D 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode D 26 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com D 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 mode D 27 DS Command sieg e ih weed a e ete dees D 27 D 5 1 Basic Commands 1 0 eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeetnaeeeeeeaaes D 27 D 5 2 Output COMMAMNAS 0 0 0 0 ee eesee eset eeeeteeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeenteeeeeaaes D 28 D 5 3 Timer and Counters eee deii aniden D 28 D 5 4 Main Control COMMANAS ee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeeeneees D 28 D 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact D 28 D 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands eee D 29 D 527 End Command inesi i eaa i D 29 D 5 8 Explanation for the Commands ccceesseeeseeeeeeenteeeeeeeees D 29 D 5 9 Description of the Application CommandS eesceecceee D 44 D 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands ceeee D 45 D 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive D 57 D 6 Error Code a a ca cee ite deeeeigatd Meccbige agua hbk hess cesta fies nels D 64 Appendix E CANopen Function 1 0 0 0 ccc niin niiiiineneeenenenenenenenes E 1 ET OVGIVieW iss ei ei eee ee tate cid ee BA Me a a te ee tee E
321. perands MC Connect the common series connection NO N7 contacts MCR Disconnect the common series connection NO N7 contacts D 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact Commands Function Operands LDP Rising edge detection operation starts X Y M T C LDF Falling edge detection operation starts X Y M T C ANDP Rising edge detection series connection X Y M T ANDF Falling edge detection series connection X Y M T C ORP Rising edge detection parallel connection X Y M T ORF Falling edge detection parallel connection X Y M T C D 28 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function D 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands Commands Function Operands PLS Rising edge output Y M PLF Falling edge output Y M D 5 7 End Command Command Function Operands END Program end none D 5 8 Explanation for the Commands Mnemonic Function LD Load A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Ea Explanations The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same
322. plate The factory setting be set to 40 X the rated current of the AC motor drive refer to Pr 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Example Suppose that the rated current of 460V 2 0hp 1 5kW is 4 2A with factory setting 4 2A The motor no load current is 1 7A 4 2X40 and it should set Pr 07 01 to 1 7 aa This parameter must be set if the Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Pr 06 06 or Slip Compensation Pr 07 03 and Pr 07 06 functions are selected Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 117 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters an If the motor no load current can t be read from the nameplate operating the AC motor drive after unloading and read it from the digital keypad optional refer to Appendix B for details aa The setting value must be less than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current gq Related parameters Pr 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 and Pr 07 06 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 07 02 X Torque Compensation Motor 0 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 An For the induction motor characteristic parts of the drive output voltage will be absorbed by the impedance of stator windings when motor load is large In this circumstance the output current will be too large and output to
323. plays the output current at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Displays the AC motor drive forward run status RUN estor Fwoe REV e e RUNe jestor Fwoe REV e e Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status The counter value C RUNe estor Fwpe REV e e RUN e je stop Fwoe REV e e Displays the selected parameter Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 21 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Display Message RUNS Fwpe ih estor RUN Fwpe REV e estor RuNe estor FwDel REV e le RUNG estor FWDel REV a le Descriptions Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter External Fault Display End for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing ENTER key After a parameter value has been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the a and keys Display Err if the input is invalid gt hea When the setting exceeds 99 99 for those numbers with 2 decimals i e unit is 0 01 it will only display 1 decimal due to 4 digital display B 22 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 8 2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad START FPA ERE
324. ply RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA NOT for VFD E C models Ar 5KQ 2 AVI 1 Reserved Master Frequency 2 EV gs2 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 3 GND ACI a a O ACI 4 SG ACIAVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V 2 ade A When switching to AVI ACM gail7 ened itindicates AVIZ Analog Signal Common jae E 8 Reserved For VFD E C models please referto figure 8 Main circuit power terminals gt Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 3 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Figure 2 for models of VFD E Series VFD002E23A VFD004E23A 43A VFD007E23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E23C VFD004E23C 43C VFD007E23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E23P VFD004E23P 43P VFD007E23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P http Awww automatedpt com BR _brake resistor optional BUE brake unit optional A Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker YS x Motor R L1 R L1 U T1 S L2 S L2 VTZ IM I A T L3 i T L3 wiT3 3 Recommended Circuit OE Sa Ji when powersupply E is turned OFF by a t SA fault output McC RB RA If the fault occurs the Multi function contact output contact will be ON to RC Refer to chapter 2 4 for details ON ing i turn off the power and OFF MC I RB Factory setting 1S protect the power system Be malfunction in
325. pt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Items Specifications Remarks When timer attains the T Present value of timer TO T15 16 points contact of timer will be On When timer attains the 73 C Present value of counter C0 C7 8 bit counter 8 points contact of timer will be w On TT Q For latched DO D9 10 points e Total is p Data For general D10 D29 20 points It can be memory area g register i for storing data Rz m oints 2 For special D1000 D1044 45 p points in K Decimal K 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation n 5 H Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation S Communication port for read write RS485 slave program Analog input output Built in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Function extension module optional Digital input output card A D D A card D 4 2 Devices Functions a The Function of Input output Contacts The function of input contact X input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program The On Off of input contact X can be changed with the On Off of input equipment but can t be changed by using peripheral equipment WPLSoft Ms The Function of Output Contact Y The mission of output contact Y is to drive the loa
326. r Setting 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 30 Constant Group 9 Communication Parameters F Factory 09 12 09 19 CANopen 0 disable 09 20 Communication i 1 Address 1 1160 127 CANbus Baud Rate _ Da Reserved Gain of CANbus 00 2 00 CANopen Guarding Time out it 1 CANopen Heartbeat Time out it 2 CANopen SYNC Time out it 3 CANopen SDO Time out Read A NUS ern it 4 CANopen SDO buffer overflow only it 5 CANbus Off it 6 Error protocol of CANopen it 7 CANopen boot up fault 4 186 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 1 0 Disable By Delta rule 1 Enable By DS402 09 24 DS402 Protocol Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Facto Y Customer Setting No function Multi function Input 11 06 Terminal MI7 Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi function Input i 11 07 Terminal MI8 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Multi function Input x A 11 08 Terminal MI9 Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base blo
327. r 2 Slip Compensation 407 28 Used without PG 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Motor 2 Motor Line to line 07 29 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 2 Motor Rated Slip 07 30 Motor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 Motor Pole Number 07 31 Motor 3 2 to 10 4 07 32 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 3 Motor No Load a 07 33 Current Motor 3 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 07 34 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 3 Slip Compensation 407 35 Used without PG 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Motor 3 Motor Line to line 07 36 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 3 07 37 Motor Rated Slip 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 Motor 3 Motor Pole Number 07 38 Motor 3 2 to 10 4 Group 8 Special Parameters Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 21 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters ices enue sate Setting ima Setting 08 00 DC Brake Current 0 to 100 Level DC Brake Time 08 02 DG Brake Time 0 0 to 60 0 sec during Stopping Start Point for DC 08 03 Brake 0 00 to 600 0Hz 0 Operation stops after momentary power loss Momentary Power 1 Operation continues after momentary 08 04 Loss Operation power loss speed search starts with the Selection Last Frequency 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency 08 05 Maximum Allowable 9 4 to 20 0 sec 2 0 Power Loss Time 0 Disable speed
328. r 4 Parameters Group 3 Output Function Parameters 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Factory Setting 8 UKAE Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Factory Setting 1 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON Master Frequency F Active when the output frequency H of AC motor drive Attained reaches the output frequency F setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed Minimum Output Frequency 4 Over Torque Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to Pr 06 03 Detection OL2 Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B 5 ae during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi function Indication input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected 7 Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal ae Active when a fault occurs oc ov OH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF Desired Frequency 1 9 Active when the desired frequency 1 Pr 03 02 is attained Attained a Terminal Count Value Active when the internal counter reaches Terminal Count Attained Value ji Preliminary Count Value Active when the internal counter reaches Preliminary Count Attained Value 12 Over Voltage Stall Active when the
329. r DC Brake 08 03 Start Point for DC Brake Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 aa This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 127 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Output Frequency Start Point for DC Brake Time during 01 05 _ Stopping 08 03 gt Minimum Output Frequency DC Brake Time during Stopping Run Stop ON OFF DC Brake Time aa DC Brake during Start up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts such as fans and pumps Under such circumstances DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion qo DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position such as cranes and cutting machines For high inertia loads a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for fast decelerations Refer to appendix B for the information of brake resistors 08 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Operation stops coast to stop after momentary power loss 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Last Frequency 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequenc
330. r Shes CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 11 2 MKE DRB POT ToS HHH T n L 0 al a 0 B 11 3 MKE EP EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable C CLAMP TWO HoE STRAP TWO HOLE STRAP Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 B 39 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 12 EMI Filter To meet EN61800 3 variable speed drive system part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods category C1 C2 and C3 Users can choose the suitable filter by the following table 1 phase s 3 phase Voltage Hp AC Motor Drive Erame Deltron Filter c3 c2 c1 0 25 VFD002E21A A phase 230V 4 VFD007E21A A 2 VEDOISEZIA E MDF25 50m 50m Fail 3 VFD022E21A B 0 5 VFD004E43A A 2 VFD015E43A A 3 phase 460V 2 VE DOZZA E KMF318A 50m 50m 50m 5 VFD037E43A B 7 5 VFD055E43A Cc 15 VFD110E43A Cc NOTE For model VFD022E21A please use MIF filter to meet Category C1 B 40 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com
331. r electric shock 3 Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration 4 Check following items after finishing the wiring A Are all connections correct B No loose wires C No short circuits between terminals or to ground Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Amen A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive 2 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation wiring and commissioning 3 Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock 2 1 Wiring Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS 485 communication port or permanent damage may result The pins 1 amp 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS 485 communication 2 2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 9
332. r example the address of Pr 04 01 is 0401H Refer to GGnnH chapter 5 for the function of each parameter When reading Parameters parameter by command code 03H only one parameter can be read at one time 00B No function A 01B Stop Bit 0 1 10B Run 11B Jog Run Bit 2 3 Reserved 00B No function 2000H aide 01B FWD it 4 Command 10B REV Write only 11B Change direction Bit 6 7 00B Comm forced 1st accel decel it 6 01B Comm forced 2nd accel decel Bit 8 15 Reserved 2001H Frequency command Bit 0 1 EF external fault on 2002H Bit 1 1 Reset Bit 2 15 Reserved Status Error code monitor 2100H 0 No error occurred Read only 1 Over current oc Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 149 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function Over voltage ov IGBT Overheat 0H1 Power Board Overheat oH2 Overload oL Overload oL1 Overload2 oL2 External fault EF OlwoI In oa ay AJOJN Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA oO Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground Fault GFF 13 Low voltage Lv 14 PHL Phase Loss 2100H
333. r executing PLC when the terminal is ON It will display PLCO to stop PLC program when terminals are OFF When external terminals are set to 23 and the terminal is ON it cannot use keypad to change PLC mode Moreover when it is PLC2 you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals D 2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function gt ea When power on after power off the PLC status will be in PLC1 Warning A This RUN instruction will affect the state of the connected PLC Do you wish to continue No 4 When you are in PLC2 please remember to change to PLC1 when finished to prevent anyone modifying PLC program gt tae When output input terminals MI1 MI9 Relay1 Relay 4 MO1 MO4 are used in PLC program they cannot be used in other places For example When YO in PLC program is activated the corresponding output terminals Relay RA RB RC will be used At this moment parameter 03 00 setting will be invalid Because the terminal has been used by PLC gt ia The PLC corresponding input points for MI1 to MI6 are X0 to X5 When extension card are added the extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in chapter D 2 2 D 2 2 Device Reference Table
334. range aa Related parameters 00 10 Control Method 04 12 Min AVI Frequency 04 14 Max AVI Frequency 04 16 Min ACI Frequency 04 18 Max ACI Frequency 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection 04 21 Min AVI2 Frequency 04 23 Max AVI2 Frequency and 07 03 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 Output Frequency 01 00 Max Output Frequency Analog Input 0V 4mA 10V 20mA Signal Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 aa This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v f curve ratio For example if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7 66 V Hz 460V 60Hz 7 66V Hz This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Frequency Pr 01 03 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 45 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters jaa If this parameter setting is less than the rated frequency of the motor it may cause over current and damage the motor or trigger the over current protection If this parameter setting is greater than the rated frequency of the motor it may cause insufficient motor torque Related parameters Pr 01 02 Maximum Output Voltag
335. rd the equivalent 6 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital input The value for Pr 04 24 to display is the result after converting 6 bit binary into decimal value Weights 2 2f 2 2 2 9 O notused Bit PEILI 1 used by PLC lt MI1 gq For example when Pr 04 24 is set to 52 decimal 110100 binary that indicates MI3 MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC When extension card is installed the number of the digital input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown as follows 4 98 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 0 not used Weights 22 2 2 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 15Usedby PLC Bt poole ilele eeo un 042s The Analog Input Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 Display Bit0 1 AVI used by PLC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 Al1 used by PLC Bit3 1 Al2 used by PLC aa The equivalent 2 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog input The value for Pr 04 25 to display is the result after converting 2 bit binary into decimal value Weights 9 2 9 9 O notused 1 used by PLC Bt afz 0 lt av i t __aciavi2 Al1 optional Al2 optional Display the Status of Multi fu
336. reafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation 1 EP LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 AND X0 Connect to contact A of X0 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil D 30 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ANI Series connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v Explanations The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X1 xo LD x1 Load contact A of X1 H r a gt ANI x0 Connect to contact B of X0 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OR Parallel connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 CO C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v v os Explanations The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the O
337. rent or lower current readout accuracy To prevent this the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3 7kW models and below And the cable should be less than 50m for 5 5kW models and above For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor 8 The AC motor drive electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be grounded separately 9 Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible 10 No brake resistor is built in the VFD E series it can install brake resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or frequent start stop Refer to Appendix B for details 11 Multiple VFD E units can be installed in one location All the units should be grounded directly to acommon ground terminal as shown in the figure below Ensure there are no ground loops 9 xX Not allowed Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 11 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 External Wiring Power Supply 1 6 FUSE NFB O Magnetic contactor Input AC Line Reactor Zero phase Reactor EMI Filter S L2 Zero phase Reactor Line Reactor 2 12 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Items Explanations Power Please follow the specific power supply supply requirements shown
338. rks belong to their respective owners CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Table of Contents Pretace a aaas aranea raa aaa a ned a valavthe a aaa a a aaa aaae adra i Table Of Contents cccecceseseseeeeeeseeeeeeseenseeeseeesessceeeseseaeseseseeesesseeeeenseenseeesees iii Chapter 1 Introduction ie cicieits cece cece cece eect onnaa oddadan aana 1 1 1 1 Receiving and Inspection cccccccececeecee cece ee eeeeneaeeeeeeeseeeecaeeeeeeeees 1 2 1 1 1 Nameplate Information ee eeesneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaas 1 2 1 1 2 Model Explanation ccccccccececeecceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeens 1 2 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation c cccccceeccecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeee 1 3 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances cececeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 1 3 1 1 5 Remove INStructions 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeneeeeeneaaa 1 7 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring eeen 1 9 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions ssssssssaraineninnsiniy nii 1 9 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parall lwyccaeuiiiin ied eins ee ee ee ee 1 12 1 3 DifMensSion Seinnse aiae dae Wah cent ai aeia 1 13 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 1 AAT aTa Te EEEE E E E E E EATA E 2 2 2 2 EXternal WiINNG sea a vesieeasete 2 12 2 3 Maim CIrC lt ssice
339. roller is used to eliminate the error during stable system The integral control doesn t stop working until error is 0 The integral is acted by the integral time The smaller integral time is set the stronger integral action will be It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to make a stable system At this moment the decreasing error will be slow The integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller This parameter is used to set the integral time of controller When the integral time is long it will have small gain of controller the slower response and bad external control When the Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters integral time is short it will have large gain of controller the faster response and rapid external control AR When the integral time is too small it may cause system oscillation AR When it is set to 0 0 the integral function is disabled an Related parameter Pr 10 05 Upper Bound for Integral Control Differential Control D Unit second Settings 0 00 to 1 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 AR The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview the change of error So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve system state Wit
340. rotocol for USB Card Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Baud rate 9600 bps Baud rate 19200 bps Baud rate 38400 bps Baud rate 57600 bps Ea Bg 7 N 2 for ASCII 7 E 1 for ASCII 7 0 1 for ASCII 8 N 2 for RTU 8 E 1 for RTU 8 0 1 for RTU 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 8 E 2 Modbus RTU 8 0 2 Modbus RTU 9 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and ramp to stop 2 Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating 09 14 Time out Detection 9 1 120 0 seconds for USB Card 0 0 Disable COM port for PLC Communication NOT for VFD E C models 09 12 0 RS485 1 USB card 0 Group 10 PID Control Parameters 3 Factory PID Set Point Selection Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 0 Disable PID operation 1 Keypad based on Pr 02 00 2 0 to 10V from AVI 3 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 4 25 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 40 01 Input Terminal for 2 Positive PID feedback from external PID Feedback terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC
341. rque is insufficient due to the motor voltage at inductance end of motor is insufficient and insufficient air gap magnetic field Using this parameter it will auto adjust output voltage by the load to get the best operation with the air gap magnetic field is held qg In V f control mode the voltage will decrease by the decreasing frequency It will cause lower torque in low speed due to less AC impedance and constant DC resistor Thus this parameter can be set for the AC drive increase its voltage output to obtain a higher torque in low speed Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor This parameter is only used for V f control mode qo Related parameters Pr 00 10 Control Method and Pr 07 08 Torque Compensation Time Constant X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Ae When the induction motor generates the electromagnetic torque it needs the necessary slip But the slip can be ignored when it needs only 2 3 slip in higher speed When the drive operates the slip and synchronous frequency are in reverse proportion That is the slip will be increased with the decreasing synchronous frequency The slip affects the motor speed seriously in low speed because the motor may stop and can t run with load when the synchronous frequency is too low While driving an asynchronous motor increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an increase in sli
342. rs Pr 01 05 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 and Pr 01 08 Output Frequency Lower Limit 10 14 Sleep Wake Up Detection Time Unit second Settings 0 0 to 6550 sec Factory Setting 0 0 4 164 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters oO If PID frequency is less than the sleep frequency when the drive starts running the drive will be in sleep mode immediately and won t limit by this parameter oO Related parameters Pr 10 15 Sleep Frequency and Pr 10 16 Wakeup Frequency 10 15 Sleep Frequency Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 aa This parameter set the frequency for the AC motor drive to be in sleep mode qo The AC motor drive will stop outputting after being sleep mode but PID controller keep operating 10 16 Wakeup Frequency Unit Hz Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 og This parameter is used to set the wakeup frequency to restart the AC motor drive after sleep mode aa The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency anj When the actual output frequency lt Pr 10 15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode and the motor will decelerate to stop by Pr 01 10 01 12 setting ani When the actual frequency command gt Pr 10 16 and the time exceeds the settin
343. rt circuit protection is provided Ground fault for AC motor drive protection not for protection of the user Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged Check for possible poor insulation at the output line Check if the motor is suitable for operation by AC motor drive Check if the regenerative energy is too large Load may have changed suddenly Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins Check if the communication protocol address transmission speed etc are properly set Use the correct checksum calculation Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information odg E Software protection failure Return to the factory E r r Analog signal error Check the wiring of ACI 1 Check parameter settings Pr 10 01 and AVI ACI wiring PID feedback signal error 2 Check for possible fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time Pr 10 08 PHE Check input phase wiring for loose contacts en n Bg c pnt Auto accel decel failure Communication Error c piu one z 3 UC Auto Tuning Error 1 Check cabling between drive and motor 2 Retry again Communication time out 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to error on the control board factory setting or power board 2 Return to the factory 1 Check if the motor is overheat Motor overheat protection 2 Check Pr 07 12 to Pr 07
344. s i e 8 bits b7 b0 It can used to represent 00 FF of hexadecimal system Word It is made up of continuous 2 bytes i e 16 bits b15 b0 It can used to represent 0000 FFFF of hexadecimal system Double It is made up of continuous 2 words i e 32 bits b31 b0 It can used to Word represent 00000000 FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system The relations among bit nibble byte word and double word of binary number are shown as follows DW lt Double Word w1 wo lt Word EEO BY3 BY2 BY1 BYO ee O_O ee S NB7 NB6 NBS NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NBO lt Nibble SS ee ee ee ee ee ete epee eke ey pre epg oy pede ets lt Octal Number OCT The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP PLC use octal number Example External input XO X7 X10 X17 device number Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function External output YO Y7 Y10 Y17 device number 3 Decimal Number DEC The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP PLC system To be the setting value of timer T or counter C such as TMR CO K50 K constant To be the device number of M T C and D For example M10 T30 device number To be operand in application command such as MOV K123 DO K constant BCD Binary Code Decimal BCD It shows a decimal number by a unit
345. s ovseh eis shone ages cx navesvarea s ceee bake iveta anatetea aia baaa 2 13 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection eee cece ee eeneeeeeenneeeseeeeeeenneeeene 2 13 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals 0 cece eeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeneeene 2 16 2 4 Control Terminal 1 s 2 ccccie cone iiaiai ai 2 17 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up ccccceeecece cece eeeeee cece ee eeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 1 3 1 Keypad iniri a iag ee da eae 3 1 3 2 Operation Method visi sucess endl a ni ei a ee 3 2 3 3 rial RUN eria n bane edee Re ee oa en eee 3 3 Chapter 4 Parameters 2 cccccccseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeneeeeeeseseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 4 1 Summary of Parameter Settings cccccecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 2 Parameter Settings for Applications 4 33 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings 0 0 0 eeseeeeseeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeae 4 38 4 4 Different Parameters for VFD E C Models eeceeenneeeeereeeees 4 182 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting ccccceceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 1 5 1 Over Current OC henr as e a a r N 5 1 5 2 Ground Faul ns nase an r a E E E N a 5 2 5 3 Over Voltage OV aiina oa a in 5 2 5 4 Low Voltage LEV retento eae ea a aoaaa EAE E TEREE 5 3 5 5 Over nE O a D E EE TEE T T TE 5 4 5 6 Overlad enha a e e aaa aaa 5 4 5 7 Keypad Display is
346. s set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained the AC drive will treat it as a fault The drive will stop and show the EF message on the display If this parameter is set to 0 and the desired value of counter is attained the AC drive will continue run aa It is used for choosing stop the AC motor drive or not when the desired value of counter is attained D DrE The digital keypad is optional When using without the keypad the FAULT LED will be ON when there is fault message or warning indication set by external terminals Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 77 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters KRIE Fan Control Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained g This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan Q Setting 0 fan will be ON after the AC motor drive is power on aa Setting 1 fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops fan will stop Baj Setting 2 fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and stops when the AC motor drive stops Setting 3 fan will auto detect the temperature of heatsink and operate by the tempera
347. s used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master PLC PC etc and AC motor drive _09 02 X Transmission Fault Treatment Factory Setting 3 Settings 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur 4 138 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com AR CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Setting 0 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running The warning message can be cleared after the communication is normal Setting 1 when transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will stop by the deceleration time Pr 01 10 01 12 It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Setting 2 When transmission errors occur it will display warning message cEXX on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop immediately It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message Setting 3 When transmission errors occur it won t display any warning message on the digital keypad and the motor will still keep running See list of error messages below see section 3 6 in Pr 09 04 gt fea The digital keypad is optional
348. sation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives a Use well insulated motor suitable for inverter operation Terminals B1 B2 for connecting brake resistor Brake resistor optional 4 BR Brake unit optional Refer to Appendix B for details pre BR pmen Ponca BRE peta ae BUE pry B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 a Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps short deceleration time too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque E If the AC motor drive has a built in brake chopper frame B frame C and VFDxxxExxT models connect the external brake resistor to the terminals B1 B2 or B1 B2 E Models of frame A don t have a built in brake chopper Please connect an external optional brake unit BUE series and brake resistor Refer to BUE series user manual for details a Connect the terminals P N of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals B1 The length of wiring should be less than 5m with cable a When not used please leave the terminals B1 open A WEE Short circuiting B2 or to B1 can damage the AC motor drive Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 2 15 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Main circuit
349. search 08 06 rats Speed 1 Speed search starts with last frequency 1 2 Starts with minimum output frequency 08 07 B B Time for Speed 9 4 to 5 0 sec 0 5 Search Current Limit for 0 08 09 Skip Frequency 1 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit Skip Frequency 1 08 10 0 00 to 600 0 He 08 11 Skip Frequency 2 0 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit 08 12 Skip Frequency 2 4 99 to 600 0 Hz Lower Limit 08 13 Skip Frequency 3 9 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit 08 14 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 4 22 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings 08 15 Auto Restart After 0 to 10 O disable Fault 08 16 Auto Reset Time at 0 1 to 6000 sec Restart after Fault 0 Disable 08 17 Auto Energy Saving 1 Enable 0 AVR function enable 1 AVR function disable 08 18 AVR Function 2 AVR function disable for decel 3 AVR function disable for stop Software Brake 115V 230V series 370 0to 430 0V 08 19 Eeva 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V Compensation 0 0 5 0 408 20 Coefficient for Motor Instability 08 21 OOB Sampling Time 9 1 to 120 0 sec 08 22 Number of OOB 00 to 32 Sampling Times 08 23 OOB Average Read only Sampling Angle g 0 Disable 08 24 DEB Function 1 Enable 08 25 DEB Return Time 0 to 250 sec 0 Disable 08 26 Speed Search IS during Start
350. smoothest qo This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S curve The S curve is disabled when set to 0 0 and enabled when set to 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 4 54 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Setting 0 1 0 01 gives the quickest and setting 10 0 10 00 the longest and smoothest S curve The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel Decel Times in Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 An The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel Decel Time is only for reference when the S curve is enabled The actual Accel Decel Time depends on the selected S curve 0 1 to 10 0 The total Accel Time Pr 01 09 Pr 01 17 or Pr 01 11 Pr 01 17 The total Decel Time Pr 01 10 Pr 01 18 or Pr 01 12 Pr 01 18 m lt Disable S curve Enable S curve Acceleration deceleration Characteristics a Related parameters Pr 01 09 Accel Time 1 Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 11 Accel Time 2 and Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 Pt Delay Time at OHz for Simple Position Unit second Pale Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position Unit second i Pyy4ae Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position Unit second PSE Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position Unit second PZ Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position Unit second KPEE Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position Unit second
351. ssage STX Pi STX i Address 1 0 Address 1 0 Address 0 T Address 0 Eik Function 1 T Function 1 i Function 0 0 Function 0 0 oO T Starting data 5 Starting data 5 address 0 address 0 oO oO oO oO Number of data 0 Number of data 0 count by word 0 count by word 0 7 mF Number of data 0 E count by byte g LRC Check g T CR The first data F END LF content g g oO The second data F content A oO LRC Check N END CR 4 146 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Command message Response message LF RTU mode Command message Response message Address 01H Address 01H Function 10H Function 10H Starting data 05H Starting data address 05H address 00H 00H Number of data 00H Number of data 00H count by word 02H count by word 02H Number of data 04 CRC Check Low 41H count by byte The first data 13H CRC Check High 04H content 88H The second data OFH content AOH CRC Check Low 4DH CRC Check High D9H 3 4 Check sum ASCII mode LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check is calculated by summing up module 256 the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2 s complement negation of the
352. sume that motor speed is 1 5Hz the delay time at 10Hz is 10 sec Pr 01 21 10 and the deceleration time from 60Hz to OHz is 40 seconds 4 56 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters The delay time at 1 5Hz is 1 5 sec and the deceleration from 1 5Hz to OHz is 1 sec The rotation speed n 120 X 1 5 4 rpm min 1 5 2 rpm sec 0 75 rpm sec The revolution numbers 1 5 2X 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 revolutions f Hz 4 5 1 5sec ns rd MI 25 ON Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 1 5 X 2r r It also means that the motor will stop after running 1 5 circles Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 1 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 1 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 1 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 1 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 1 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 1 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Se
353. t coil X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 TO 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v r Explanations Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device Motion of coil contact OUT command Operation Contact result Coil A contact normally open B contact normally closed FALSE OFF Non continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non continuity Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 D 35 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo X1 LDI X0 Load contact B of XO Ju Cr AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function SET Latch ON X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0O 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand aa v v Explanations When the SET command is driven its specific device is set to be ON which will keep ON whether the SET command is still driven You can use the RST command to set the device to OFF Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation xo YO LD X0 Load contact A of X0 Hi ANI YO Connect to contact B of YO in series SET Y1 Y1 latch ON Mnemonic Function RST Clear the contacts or the registers X0 X17 YO Y17 MO0 M159 TO 15 C0 C7 DO D29 Operand v v v v
354. tage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IE 18 TN 10 ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2 12 24 AO2 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current ea AO2 Analog Output Gain Unit Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 aa Setting method for the AO2 is the same as the AO1 1226 W Analog Input Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 No function 1 Source of the 1st frequency 2 Source of the 2nd frequency Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 175 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters A AUI Analog Input Bias Unit Settings 0 00 to 200 00 Factory Setting 0 00 12 28 AUI Bias Polarity Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive bias 1 Negative bias 122 X AUI Analog Gain Unit Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 1220 AUI Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 No AUI Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias REV Motion Enabled 2 Negative Bias REV Motion Disabled 12 31 AUI Analog Input Delay Unit 2ms Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 50 qi In a noisy environment it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin It is recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operat
355. tem would not detect any abnormality signal gq Related parameter Pr 13 08 Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault 4 180 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 13 08 X Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep operating m AR AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback or PG encoder feedback are abnormal Setting Pr 13 08 to 0 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display PGEr on the digital keypad and the stop to OHz by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 setting Setting Pr 13 08 to 1 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display PGEr on the digital keypad and the motor will free run to stop Setting Pr 13 08 to 2 When the feedback signal fault occurs it will display PGEr on the digital keypad and the motor will keep running It needs to press RESET to clear the warning message PGEr displayed on the keypad gt ta The digital keypad is optional Please refer to Appendix B for details When using without this optional keypad the FAULT LED will be ON once there is error messages or warning messages from the external terminals 13 10 Source of the High speed Counter NOT for VFD E C models Factory Display 0
356. terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 WITS Models Wire Torque Wire type VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C Stranded VFD015E23C 43C oo 14kgf cm copper VFDO02E11T 21T 23T 5 4 mm 12in Ibf Only VFDO04E11T 21T 23T f 75C 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Main circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1 B2 Models Wire Torque Wire type VFDO07E11A VFD015E21A VFD022E21A 23A 43A Stranded VFD037E23A 43A 8 18 AWG 18kgf cm copper VFDO07E11C 8 4 0 8mm 15 6in Ibf Only VFD015E21C 75 C VFD022E21C 23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C 2 16 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Main circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1
357. than 90 C Please contact DELTA Yes Y Yes Is load too large R gt Reduce load No o lt If cooling fan functions normally pak gt Change cooling fan Yes P v N yi gt lt Check if cooling fan is jammed gt S Remove obstruction No Check if surrounding temperature Yes gt Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or is within specification misoperation due to noise Please contact x DELTA No v Adjust surrounding temperature to specification 5 6 Overload OL OL1 OL2 AA Check for correct settings at No z P Pr 06 06 and 06 07 gt Modify setting Yes Is load too large No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Yes bf gt Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive 5 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 7 Keypad Display is Abnormal Abnormal display or no display pee Cycle power to AC motor drive Fix connector and eliminate noise he Display normal _No___ Check if all connectors are connect correctly and no noise is present Yes Yes y AC motor drive works normally AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact DELTA 5 8 Phase Loss PHL Phase loss
358. the acceleration time 2 setting Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting to 1 3 or 4 4 108 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Related parameters Pr 01 09 Accel Time 1 Pr 01 11 Accel Time 2 Pr 01 16 Auto acceleration deceleration refer to Accel Decel time setting Pr 03 00 Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Pr 03 01 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 and Pr 06 03 Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 06 01 output current Over Current Detection gt setting ievel frequency b Over Current Stall output current prevention during Acceleration frequency held gt E a Time previous acceleration time 4 gt actual acceleration time when over current stall prevention is enabled 06 02 Over current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable The over current stall prevention during operation function is a protection When the motor runs with constant speed the AC motor drive will decrease the output frequency automatically when momentary overload If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr 06 02 when the drive is operating the drive will decrease its output frequency by Pr 01 10 Pr 01 12 to prevent the motor stall If the output current is
359. the brake module For frame B C and D terminal B1 is connected to the terminal of the brake module 1 12 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeter and inch Frame A D DA wi D2 aaa i J z i Di fa oF fs fo a s1 _s2_ Unit mm inch Frame Ww w1 H H1 D D1 D2 S1 S2 A A1 72 0 60 0 142 0 120 0 152 0 50 0 4 5 5 2 5 2 2 83 2 36 5 59 4 72 5 98 1 97 0 18 0 20 0 20 A A2 72 0 56 0 155 0 143 0 111 5 9 5 5 3 2 83 2 20 6 10 5 63 4 39 0 37 0 21 gt ta Frame A A1 VFD002E11A 21A 23A VFD004E11A 21A 23A 43A VFD007E21A 23A 43A VFD015E23A 43A VFD002E11C 21C 23C VFD004E11C 21C 23C 43C VFD007E21C 23C 43C VFD015E23C 43C VFD002E11T 21T 23T VFD004E11T 21T 23T 43T VFD007E21T 23T 43T VFD015E23T 43T Frame A A2 VFD002E11P 21P 23P VFD004E11P 21P 23P 43P VFD007E21P 23P 43P VFD015E23P 43P Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 1 13 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Frame B D ZoD oe Eo Sonos R e TR d larka s1 92 Unit
360. tion Output Terminal MO1 AC DC magnetic plate Load Motor aa Example When using Pr 03 11 and Pr 03 12 are used in life equipment as above figure The timing figure is shown as follows The DC brake is used before start up and after stop It can have high output torque at the beginning of start up The Brake Release Frequency Pr 03 11 can be set by the requirement The Brake Engage Frequency Pr 03 12 can be set by requirement to be used when stopping near OHz to prevent vibration of counterforce for smooth operation 4 80 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Output frequency H setting frequency 03 11 Brake release frequency 03 12 Brake engage frequency DC brake DC brake 08 01 08 02 DC brake time DC brake time RUN STOP during start up RUN STOP during stopping Brake control ON OFF MO1 21 osas Display the Status of Multi function Output Terminals Settings Read Only Factory display 255 Bit0 RLY Status Bit1 MO1 Status Bit2 MO2 RA2 Status Bit3 MO3 RA3 Status Bit4 MO4 RA4 Status Bit5 MOS5 RAS Status Bit6 MO6 RA6 Status Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status aa When all output external terminals aren t activated Pr 03 13 will display 255 11111111 an For standard AC motor drive witho
361. tion and keep the current around 100 Besides it will perform deceleration no matter over current occurs during deceleration or constant speed The present over current stall prevention during acceleration is used to keep the output frequency and prevent from the drive overload OL an When this parameter is set to 5 Linear Accel controlled by current linear Decel the drive will perform the linear deceleration by the setting of deceleration time When this parameter is set to 6 Linear Accel controlled by current auto Decel the drive stop the motor by the fastest deceleration time after auto distinguish load regenerative energy A Over current Output level current Speed Output frequency gt gq Auto acceleration deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor an In applications with brake resistor or brake unit the deceleration time is the shortest It is NOT recommended to use Auto deceleration function or it will extend the deceleration time p D Related parameters Pr 01 09 Accel Time 1 Pr 01 10 Decel Time 1 Pr 01 11 Accel Time 2 and Pr 01 12 Decel Time 2 AMTES Acceleration S Curve Unit second AMEE Deceleration S Curve Unit second Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 0 S curve disabled 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 S curve enabled 10 0 10 00 is the
362. tion to the motor and motor maybe damaged If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small it cannot offer the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor user application requirements cannot be met completely Therefore a designer should consider all the conditions including load type load speed load characteristic operation method rated output rated speed power and the change of load capacity The following table lists the factors you need to consider depending on your requirements Related Specification Item Speed and torque characteristics Time Overload Starting ratings capacity torque Friction load and weight load Liquid viscous load Inertia load e Load with power transmission Constant torque Constant output Decreasing torque e o Decreasing output Constant load Load Shock load characteristics Repetitive load o e o High starting torque Low starting torque Continuous operation Short time operation e Long time operation at medium low speeds Maximum output current instantaneous e Constant output current continuous Maximum frequency Base frequency J Power supply transformer capacity or percentage impedance Voltage fluctuations and unbalance Number of phases single phase protection Frequency Mechanical friction losses in wiring J e Load type Load speed and torque c
363. to check how the rated current rated voltage and max carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code BA Pr 00 01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct 115V Series 230V Series kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 HP 0 25 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 15 20 Pr 00 00 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Rated Output Current A 1 6 2 5 4 2 7 5 11 0 17 25 33 45 65 Max Carrier 15kHz Frequency Ba 460V Series kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 HP 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 Pr 00 00 3 5 7 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 Rated Output 45 25 42 55 85 13 18 24 32 38 45 Current A Max Carrier 15kHz Frequency 00 02 Parameter Reset Settings 0 1 6 9 Factory Setting 0 Parameter can be read written All parameters are read only Clear PLC program NOT for VFD E C models All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 115V 220V 440V 4 38 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters oO This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records Pr 06 08 Pr 06 12 50Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 0
364. together Act immediately when count attains It has no relation with scan period Functions When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On the present va ue of counter equals to settings and output coil is On Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings 16 bit counters CO C7 1 Setting range of 16 bit counter is KO K32 767 KO is the same as K1 output contact will be On immediately at the first count 2 General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss If counter is latched it will remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss 3 If using MOV command WPLSoft to send a value which is large than setting to CO register at the next time that X1 is from Off to On CO counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings 4 The setting of counter can use constant K or register D not includes special data register D1000 D1044 to be indirect setting 5 If using constant K to be setting it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D it can be positive negative number The next number that counter counts up from 32 767 is 32 768 D 22 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function Example LD X0 X0 RST Co E L
365. tomatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive This page intentionally left blank C 8 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function This function is NOT for VFD E C models D 1 PLC Overview D 1 1 Introduction The PLC function built in the VFD E provides following commands WPLSoft basic commands and application commands The operation methods are the same as Delta DVP PLC series D 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor WPLSoft WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP PLC series and VFD E series for WINDOWS Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions such as cut paste copy multi windows WPLSoft also provides various Chinese English comment editing and other special functions e g register editing settings the data readout the file saving and contacts monitor and set etc Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft Item System Requirement Operation Windows 95 98 2000 NT ME XP System CPU Pentium 90 and above Memory 16MB and above 32MB and above is recommended gt Capacity 50MB and above nere pik CD ROM for installing WPLSoft Monit Resolution 640x480 16 colors and above ool It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800x600 Mouse General mouse or the dev
366. tor number 00 03 M LU When Pr00 03 is set to 03 the display is according to the setting of Pr00 04 na When Pr 00 04 is set to 0 please refer to Pr 00 05 for details Related parameter Pr 00 05 User Defined Coefficient K f 4 40 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters gt fea Please refer to Appendix B 8 KPE LE02 for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad 00 05 X User Defined Coefficient K Settings 0 1 to 160 0 Factory Setting 1 0 aa The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user defined unit The display value is calculated as follows U User defined unit Actual output frequency K Pr 00 05 Example If user wants to use RPM to display the motor speed when 4 polse motor runs at 60Hz The user can display the motor speed by setting Pr 00 04 to 0 The application is shown as follows From the formula of motor speed user defined unit U RPM 60X120 4 1800 disregard slip Therefore User Defined Coefficient K is 30 0 PrE 120 Formula of motor speed n De n speed RPM revolution per minute P pole number of motor f operation frequency Hz 00 06 Power Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display HHH 00 07 Control Board Software Version Settings Read Only
367. tor overload Check electronic thermal overload setting Use a higher power motor Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr 07 00 Reduce the motor load Adjust the over torque detection setting to an appropriate setting Pr 06 03 to Pr 06 05 Return to the factory When the external input terminal B B is active the AC motor drive output will be turned off Deactivate the external input terminal B B to operate the AC motor drive again Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault P i Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines 2 Torque boost too high Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 3 Acceleration Time too short Increase the Acceleration Time 4 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Deceleration Time too short Increase the Deceleration Time 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model och Over current during acceleration ocd Over current during decelerati
368. tory Settings NPN mode ON Connect to DCM Terminal 6 7 Symbol Terminal Function ON Run in MI1 direction MI1 Forward Stop command OFF Stop acc to Stop Method ON Run in MI2 direction MI2 Reverse Stop command OFF Stop acc to Stop Method MI3 Multi function Input 3 Refer to Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for programming the MIl4 Multi function Input 4 Multi function Inputs MI5 Multi function Input 5 ON the activation current is 16mA OFF leakage current tolerance is 10 A MIG Multi function Input 6 24V DC Voltage Source 24VDC 20mA used for PNP mode Common for digital inputs and used for NPN DCM Digital Signal Common mode Multi function Relay output Resistive Load N O a 5A N O 3A N C 240VAC 5A N O 3A N C 24VDC RB Multi function Relay output Inductive Load N C b 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 240VAC 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 24VDC Refer to Pr 03 00 for programming RA RC Multi function Relay common 2 18 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal z 5 Factory Settings NPN mode Terminal Function Symbol ON Connect to DCM Maximum 48VDC 50mA Refer to Pr 03 01 for programming Max 48Vdc MO1 DCM 50mA MO1 Multi function Output 1 Mort Photocoupler y F internal circuit MCM Multi function output comm
369. tput Frequency Fmax Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 161 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Primary Delay Filter Time Unit second Settings 0 0 to 2 5 sec Factory Setting 0 0 gq It is used to set the time that required for the low pass filter of PID output Increasing the setting it may affect the drive s response speed an The frequency output of PID controller will filter after primary delay filter time It can smooth the change of the frequency output The longer primary delay filter time is set the slower response time it will be The unsuitable primary delay filter time may cause system oscillation qo PID control can be used for speed pressure and flow control It needs to use with the relevant equipment of sensor feedback for PID control Refer to the following for the closed loop control diagram Freq Command Integral Output Digital a gain Freq s Setpoint gt O P imit ol tion filter 5 10 02 10 03 10 05 10 07 10 06 10 04 Input Freq PID Gain feedback Sensor 10 10 10 01 10 07 PID Output Frequency Limit Unit Settings 0 to 110 Factory Setting 100 Am This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control The formula is Output Frequency Limit Maximum Output Frequ
370. tput Spec gt OUTPUT 3PH 0 240V 4 2A 1 6kKVA 0 75kW 1HP Output Frequency Range FREQUENCY RANGE 0 1 400Hz SerialNumber amp Bar Code MHUIN MWINUKA JAY IMI 01 03 E23A0T 8011230 i PowerBoard Software Version contol Board 02 03 1 1 2 Model Explanation A Standard drive VFD 007 E 23 A C CANopen Mains Input Voltage E Series Applicable motor capacity 007 1 HP 0 75kW 075 10 HP 7 5kW 015 2 a 110 aH 022 3 HP 2 2kW 150 20 HP 15k Series Name Variable Frequency Drive P Cold plate drive frame A only Version Type T FrameA built in brake chopper 11 115V Single phase 21 230V Single phase 23 230V Three phase 43 460V Three phase 002 0 25 HP 0 2kW 037 5 HP 3 7kW 185 25 HP 18 5kW 004 0 5 HP 0 4kW 055 7 5HP 5 5kW 220 30 HP 22kW 1 2 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 007E23A OT 8 01 1230 Production number Production week Production year 2008 Production factory T Taoyuan W Wujiang Model 230V 3 phase 1HP 0 75kW If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems please contact your distributor 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 0 25 2HP 0 2 1 5kW Frame A Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Keypad cov
371. tting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 2 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 2 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 2 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 57 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 2 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 2 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 2 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 3 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 3 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 3 Unit Hz Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 3 Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory
372. ttp Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function X0 zcr ero kroo cro wo MO IfC10 lt K10 MO On M1 H IfK10 lt C10 lt K100 M1 On M2 If C10 gt K100 M2 On 3 To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction X0 X0 API Mnemonic Operands Function 12 MOV P S D Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps oF x y m K H Knx kny knm T c D Mov MOVP 5 steps D a slele Operands S Source of data D Destination of data Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 When this instruction is executed the content of S will be moved directly to D When this instruction is not executed the content of D remains unchanged Program Example MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16 bit data 1 When X0 Off the content in D10 will remain unchanged If XO On the value K10 will be moved to D10 data register 2 When X1 Off the content in D10 will remain unchanged If X1 On the present value TO will be moved to D10 data register D 48 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function
373. ture When heatsink temperature is higher than 60 C fan will run and the fan will stop once the heatsink temperature is lower than 40 C The Digital Output Used by PLC NOT for VFD E C models Settings Read Only Factory display 0 BitO 1 RLY used by PLC Bit1 1 MO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 MO2 RA2 used by PLC Bit3 1 MO3 RA3 used by PLC Bit4 1 MO4 RA4 used by PLC Bit5 1 MO5 RA5 used by PLC Bit6 1 MO6 RA6 used by PLC Bit7 1 MO7 RA7 used by PLC aa The equivalent 8 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital output The value that Pr 03 09 displays is the result after converting 8 bit binary into decimal value 4 78 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters aa For standard AC motor drive it only has 2 bit bitO and bit1 When extension card is installed the number of the digital output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows 0 not used Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Used by PLC Bit 76s 4 3 2 1 0 Rrelay1 MO7 RA7 og For example when Pr 03 09 is set to 3 decimal 00000011 binary that indicates Relay1 and MO1 are used by PLC Pr 03 09 2 2 3 0O not used Weights 2 2 2 2f 2 2 2 2 15Used by PLC t mo MO2 RA2 MO3 RA3 MO4 RA4 MO
374. up 1 Enable Speed Search 0 By setting frequency 08 27 ee iad during 4 By max operation frequency Pr 01 00 Group 9 Communication Parameters Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 23 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 7 Factory Parametar Explanation Setting Communication x 09 00 Address 1 to 254 0 Baud rate 4800bps 1 Baud rate 9600bps Transmission Speed 2 Baud rate 19200bps 3 Baud rate 38400bps 0 Warn and keep operating Transmission Fault 1 Warn and ramp to stop 3 Treatment 2 Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating 0 1 120 0 seconds 409 03 Time out Detection 0 0 Disable 0 7 N 2 Modbus ASCII 4 7 E 1 Modbus ASCII eune Ton 2 7 0 1 Modbus ASCII Protocol 3 8 N 2 Modbus RTU 4 8 E 1 Modbus RTU 5 8 0 1 Modbus RTU 6 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 7 8 E 2 Modbus RTU 8 8 0 2 Modbus RTU 9 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII 09 06 06 Reserved Response Delay 0 200 unit 2ms 4 24 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Baud rate 4800 bps http www automatedpt com Transmission Speed for USB Card Communication Protocol for USB Card 09 08 09 09 09 09 409 10 Communication P
375. upies fixed storage unit When using these equipments the corresponding content will be read by bit byte or word Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1 You couldn t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON OFF via WPLSoft The contacts contact a b can be used unlimitedly If there is no input signal the corresponding input relay could be empty and can t be used with other functions P Equipment indication method XO X1 X7 X10 X11 The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point it is used to connect to external load It can be driven by input relay contact the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts It doesn t have the corresponding output relay if need it can be used as internal relay F Equipment indication YO Y1 Y7 Y10 Y11 The symbol of equipment is Y and the number uses octal Internal relay The internal relay doesn t connect directl
376. ure 8 Shielded leads amp Cable 2 5 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 4 for models of VFD E Series VFD022E23A 43A VFD037E23A 43A VFD055E23A 43A VFD075E23A 43A VFD110E23A 43A VFD022E23C 43C VFD037E23C 43C VFD055E23C 43C VFD075E23C 43C VFD110E23C 43C VFD150E23A 23C VFD150E43A 43C VFD185E43A 43C VFD220E43A 43C brake resistor optional A A Fuse NFB No Fuse Breaker B1 B2 S 7 Motor R L1 R L1 U T1 IM S L2 S L2 V T2 3 i J alk i T L3 TE fi Q T L3 W T3 O Recommended Circuit O pd l when power supply SK E OF i is turned OFF by a l 7 fault output RB ifthe fault occurs the Me RC RAC BE a penis hata iat contact will be ON to ory T efer to chapter 4 Tor details ON ingi turn off the power and OFF MC RB Factory setting is protect the power system malfunction indication 24V RC FWD Stop Factory setting if REV St MI1 MO1 Factory setting NPN Mode op MI2 v k Drive is in operation iis Factory e Multi step 1 MI3 F gt a 48V50mA Max w j setting Multi step 2 MI4 Multi function PNP Y Photocoulper Output Please refer to Figure7 Multi step 3 MI5 MCM 7 p for wiring of NPN Multi step 4 i i mode and PNP aiiansire MI6 AFM eae T a nal Common mode i 9 eh DCM factory setting Analog freq current meter E A
377. ut extension card the multi function output terminals are falling edge triggered and Pr 03 13 will display 3 11 for no action 1 20 O Acti Weights 2 2 0 Active 1 Off MO1 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 81 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters For Example If Pr 03 13 displays 2 it means Relay 1 is active The display value 2 bit 1 X 2 Q When extension card is installed the number of the multi function output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function output terminals is shown as follows 0 Active Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Off MO7 RA7 4 82 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters 04 00 X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Unit Settings 0 0 to 200 0 Factory Setting 0 0 04 01 X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive Bias 1 Negative Bias 04 02 X Keypad Potentiometer Gain Unit Settings 0 1 to 200 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias REV Motion Enabled oO Pr 04 0
378. utine timer turned OFF D 38 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function The coil is OFF and the counting value and the contact stay at Counter their present condition Coils driven up by the OUT All turned OFF command Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition All of them are not acted but the nest loop FOR NEXT Application commands command will still be executed for times defined by users even though the MC MCR commands is OFF 2 MCR is the main control ending command that is placed at the end of the main control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command 3 Commands of the MC MCR main control program supports the nest program structure with 8 layers as its greatest Please use the commands in order from NO N7 and refer to the following Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X0 LD x0 Load A contact of X0 MC NO Enable NO common series x1 connection contact Cro LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT YO Drive YO coil bK C v1 gt LD x2 Load A contact of X2 MC N1 Enable N1 common series MCR connection contact LD X3 Load A contact of X3 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil X11 MCR N1 Disable N1 common series connection contact MCR MCR NO Disable NO common series
379. ution Speed Basic commands minimum 0 24 us Application commands 10 hundreds us Program Language Instruction Ladder Logic SFC Including the Step commands Program Capacity 500 STEPS SRAM Battery Commands 45 commands 28 basic commands 17 application commands Input Output Contact Input X 6 output Y 2 X0 X17 16 points __ Correspond to external 3 External Input Relay octal number system Total is input point 32 Y External Output Relay YO Y17 16 points points Correspond to external octal number system output point MO M159 160 For general points Total is i M Auxiliary 192 Contacts can switch to M1000 M1031 32 points C OM in Program For special points p 3 When the timer E Total is ebena chia 5 command attains the T Timer 100ms timer TO T15 16 points 16 setting the T contact 3 points with the same number a will be On 16 bit count up for CO C7 8 points Total is cai 3 points When the counter Pa 1 phase input indicated by CNT C Counter A p i command attains the 4 tting the C tact up down 1 Phase2 235 1 point need Total is S N d te contac inputs k __ with the same number high to use with PG card 4 point will be On speed gt _phase 2 counter inputs D 18 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automated
380. utomatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters the transient response of the AC motor drive Applications textile equipment press equipment life equipment and drilling machine AR Related parameter Pr 07 02 Torque Compensation Motor 0 00 11 Reserved 00 12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 230V 400V 1 220V 380V Aa This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz aa When Pr 00 02 is set to 9 the base voltage for 50Hz will set by Pr 00 12 AR Related parameter Pr 00 02 Parameter Reset 4 44 Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 1 Basic Parameters Maximum Output Frequency Fmax Unit Hz Settings 50 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 60 00 aa This parameter determines the AC motor drive s Maximum Output Frequency All the AC motor drive frequency command sources analog inputs 0 to 10V and 4 to 20mA are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range aa Please note that output frequency may be not in this setting range due to parameter setting 1 Pr 00 10 is set to 0 when enabling Pr 07 03 Slip Compensation in V f mode it may be not in this setting range 2 Pr 00 10 is set to 1 The AC motor drive will auto compensate slip in vector mode so it also may be not within this setting
381. ve signs of S1 S2 and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit command 1 b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b15 of D 1 Symbol bit 0 refers to a positive value Symbol bit 1 refers to a negative value When D serves as a bit device it can designate K1 K4 and construct a 16 bit result occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16 bit data Program Example The 16 bit DO is multiplied by the 16 bit D10 and brings forth a 32 bit product The higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16 bit are stored in D20 On Off of the most left bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 D 53 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Appendix D How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 23 DIV P S4 S2 D Division Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps ae x y m K H Knx kny Knm T c D pIy Dive 7 steps i al e alele S el e alele D a aelele Operands S4 Dividend Sz Divisor D Quotient and remainder Explanations Al 2 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices This instruction divides S4 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S4 S2 and
382. wer and remove the cover Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out and then confirm that the capacitors have fully It should be less than 25VDC discharged by measuring the voltage between 6 6 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Aa Chapter 6 Fault Code Information http www automatedpt com and Maintenance 3 4 Disconnect AC power before processing Only qualified personnel can install wire and maintain AC motor drives Please take off any metal objects such as watches and rings before operation And only insulated tools are allowed Never reassemble internal components or wiring Prevent static electricity Periodical Maintenance Ambient environment Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Half Year One Daily Year Check the ambient temperature humidity vibration and see if Visual inspection and measurement with equipment with standard O there are any dust gas oil or a specification water drops Check if there are any dangerous objects in the Visual inspection O environment Voltage Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Half Year One Daily Year Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct Measure with multimeter with standard o specificatio
383. ww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix A Specifications This page intentionally left blank A 4 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Appendix B Accessories B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Note Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values Other resistors and values will void Delta s warranty Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference Refer to the Brake unit Module User Manual for further details Se opens eae Equivalent Brake Unit Part Brake Resistors Brake atest 8 AC Drive Part No Resistor Value No and Part No and Torque g hp kW Torie recommended Quantity Quantity 10 ED fren a 0 25 0 2 MEDOOZEMIAIC 11P 0 110 ZOON 2502 BUE 20015 1 BR200W250 1 320 2009 2 VFDO02E11T 200W 2502 BR200W250 1 320 2000 2 05 o4 VED004E11A7110711P 0 216 ZOON 2502 BUE 20015 1 BR200w250 1 170 1002 4 VFDOO4E11T 200W 2502 BR200W250 1 170 1009 14 0 75 VFD007E11A 11C 11P 0 427 200W 1500 BR200W150 1 140 800 VFDO02E21A 21C 21P 23A 200W 2502 0 2
384. ww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters 11 10 Multi function Input Terminal MI11 11 11 Multi function Input Terminal M112 Settings 0 to 23 Factory Setting 0 aa Refer to the table below Pr 04 08 for setting the multifunction input terminals L Set the corresponding parameter according to the terminal labeled on the extension card 4 170 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details 12 00 Al1 Function Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback 201 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVI3 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V aa Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IE 18 Te 10 ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2 a Min AVI3 Input Voltage Unit V Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 a Min AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit Settings 0 0 t
385. www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters Group 6 Protection Parameters 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Unit V Settings 115V 230V series 330 0 to 410 0V Factory Setting 390 0 460V series 660 0 to 820 0V Factory Setting 780 0 0 Disable Over voltage Stall Prevention with brake unit or brake resistor aa During deceleration the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration When this function is enabled the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again aa With moderate inertia load over voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads If the deceleration time is critical for the application a brake resistor or brake unit should be used oO When the function of over voltage stall prevention is activated the deceleration time of the AC motor drive will be larger than the setting aa When the deceleration time is obstruction in the application it is not suitable to use this function The solution are 1 moderate increase the deceleration time 2 used with a brake resistor refer to appendix B for details to consume the regenerative energy by heat oO Related parameters Pr 01 10 Decel Tim
386. www automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction Remove Keypad 1 Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover 2 Pull the cover up to release Remove Front Cover Step 1 Step 2 Remove RST Terminal Cover For Frame B Frame C and Frame D it only needs to turn the cover lightly to open it For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be wired directly Remove UVW Terminal Cover For Frame B Frame C and Frame D it only needs to turn the cover light to open the cover For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be wired directly Remove Fan For Frame A Frame B Frame C and Frame D press and hold in the tabs on each side of the fan and pull the fan up to release CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Remove Extension Card For Frame A Frame B Frame C and Frame D press and hold in the tabs on each side of the extension card and pull the extension card up to release On the other hand it can install the extension card into the AC motor drive with screws Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions Operation Storage Transportation Pollution Degree Air Temperature Relative Humidity Atmosphere pressure
387. x output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 16 7 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command 60Hz 40Hz Bias 10Hz Adjustment Ey i OHz OV 5V 8 33V10V Bias adjustment 10Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 16 7 Gain 100 Example 3 Use of bias and gain for use of full range This example also shows a popular method The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired In addition to signals of 0 to 10V the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V or any value under 10V Regarding the setting please refer to the following examples Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 20 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 83 3 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Bias 10Hz Kaj stmani i Gain 10V 10V 2V 100 83 3 ovo 5V 10V Bias adjustment 10Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 20 0 XV Example 4 Use of 0 5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts Instead of adjusting gain as example below you can set Pr 01 00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results Gain adjustment Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 0 Bias adjustment Pi Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias SOHZ efte i Pr 04 02 200 Input gain a i Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 5V 100 200 OHz OV 5V 10V 4 84 Revision Oct 2009 0
388. x0003 define MCR 0x0004 define LSR 0x0005 define MSR 0x0006 unsigned char rdat 60 read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 unsigned char tdat 60 0 1 0 3 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 2 D 7 r n void main int i outportb PORT MCR 0x08 interrupt enable outportb PORT IER 0x01 interrupt as data in outportb PORT LCR inportb PORT LCR 0x80 the BRDL BRDH can be access as LCR b7 1 outportb PORT BRDL 12 set baudrate 9600 12 115200 9600 outportb PORT BRDH 0x00 outportb PORT LCR 0x06 set protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 06H lt 7 E 1 gt 1AH lt 7 0 1 gt 0AH lt 8 N 2 gt 07H lt 8 E 1 gt 1BH lt 8 0 1 gt 0BH for i 0 i lt 16 i while inportb PORT LSR amp 0x20 wait until THR empty outportb PORT THR tdat i send data to THR i 0 while kbhit if inportb PORT LSR amp 0x01 bO 1 read data ready rdat i inportb PORT RDR read data form RDR 09 05 Reserved MPRI E Reserved 09 07 X Response Delay Time Unit 2ms Settings 0 200 400msec Factory Setting 1 4 154 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters a This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following 1 u
389. xternal terminal Weights 2 2 2 22 22 2 2 2 2 2 1 internalterminal Bit 0 m1 2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 AAS M12 04 28 X Internal Terminal Status Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 an This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad optional communication or PLC an For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following Weights 2 2f 2 2 2 9 O set internal terminal to be OFF Bit rs 4 3121119 ask el terminal to be ON 4 102 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters AR For example if setting MI3 MI5 and MI6 to be ON Pr 04 28 should be set to bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X2 1X2 1X2 1X27 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 OZOFF 1 ON Bt 7 1 o 1 o o mi AR When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows 0 set internal terminal to be OFF Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 set internal terminal to be ON Bit Revision Oct 2009 O7EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 4 103 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 htt
390. y gq This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a momentary power loss aa The power connected to the AC motor drive may be off temporarily with unknown factors This parameter can restart the drive after momentary power loss aa Setting 1 the drive will operate by the last frequency before momentary power loss It will accelerate to the master frequency after the drive output frequency and the motor rotor s speed are synchronous It is recommended to use this setting for those motor loads which have a large inertia and small resistance to save time by restarting without waiting the flywheel stops completely such as machinery equipment with a large inertia flywheel 4 128 Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http Awww automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com Chapter 4 Parameters a Setting 2 the drive will operate by the min frequency It will accelerate to the master frequency after the drive output frequency and motor rotor speed are synchronous It is recommended to use this setting for those motor loads which have a small inertia and large resistance aa When using with PG card the speed search will start with the actual motor speed detected by the drive and accelerate to the setting frequency setting 1 and 2 are invalid at this moment oO Related parameters Pr 08 05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Pr 08 07 Base
391. y to outside It is an auxiliary relay in PLC Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit It can be driven by the contact of input relay output relay or other internal equipment Its contacts can be used unlimitedly Internal auxiliary relay can t output directly it should output with output point a Equipment indication MO M1 M4 M159 The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system Timer Timer is used to control time There are coil contact and timer storage When coil is ON its contact will act contact a is close contact b is open when attaining desired time The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period Once the coil is OFF the contact won t act contact a is open and contact b is close and the timer will be set to zero a Equipment indication TO T1 115 The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system The different number range corresponds with the different timing period Counter Counter is used to count It needs to set counter before using counter i e the pulse of counter There are coil contacts and storage unit of counter in counter When coil is from OFF to ON that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1 There are 16 bit 32 bit and high speed counter for us
392. zed communication objects including real time data Process Data Objects PDO configuration data Service Data Objects SDO and special functions Time Stamp Sync message and Emergency message And it also has network management data including Boot up message NMT message and Error Control message Refer to CiA website http www can cia org for details The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http www delta com tw industrialautomation Delta CANopen supports functions a Support CAN2 0A Protocol E Support CANopen DS301 V4 02 E Support DSP 402 V2 0 7 Delta CANopen supports services PDO Process Data Objects PDO1 PDO2 E SDO Service Data Object Initiate SDO Download Initiate SDO Upload Abort SDO SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node a SOP Special Object Protocol Support default COB ID in Predefined Master Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4 02 Support SYNC service Support Emergency service E NMT Network Management Support NMT module control Support NMT Error control Support Boot up Delta CANopen doesn t support service E Time Stamp service Revision Oct 2009 07EE SW PW V1 14 CTL V2 14 E 1 CALL NOW 800 985 6929 http www automatedpt com CALL NOW 800 985 6929 Appendix E CANopen Function E 1 Overview E 1 1 CANopen Protocol

Delta VFD-E-User-Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents